REG-DA
REG-DA
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring
Operating Manual
Software Version
Issue 18.10.07/03a
Issue GB
Version 10.2007
REG-DA operating manual
1
REG-DA
REG-DA
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring
Operating Manual
Issue 18.10.07
Copyright 2007 by A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG..
All rights reserved.
Published by:
A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG
Frankenstraße 160
D-90461 Nuremberg, Germany
Tel.: +49 (0) 911 / 62 81 08 - 0
Fax No.: +49 (0)-911 / 62 81 08 - 96
e-mail: info@a-eberle.de
Internet: www.a-eberle.de, www.regsys.de
The company A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG cannot be held liable for
any damages or losses resulting from printing errors or changes
in this operating manual.
Furthermore, A. Eberle GmbH & Co. KG does not assume
responsibility for any damages and losses resulting from
defective devices or from devices altered by the user.
2
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Table of Contents
1
Warnings and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
Scope of Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3
Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1
Basic equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2
Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.3
Overview of features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.4
Block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.4.1
3.4.2
Block diagram for features D0/D1/D4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Block diagram for features D2/D3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.5
Pin Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
Pin assignment level I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Pin assignment level II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Pin assignment level III. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
3.6
Types of REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
Wall-mounting version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Panel-mounting version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Mounting on Standard Mounting Rails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4
Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.1
Display and control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.1.1
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.2
Operating principle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
4.3
Selecting the display mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
4.4
Lamp check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.5
Resetting fault signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
4.6
Operating the recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
REG-DA operating manual
3
REG-DA
5
Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
5.1
Regulator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.2
Measurement transducer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.3
Recorder mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.4
Statistics mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
5.5
ParaGramer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
5.6
Choosing the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.7
Setpoint value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
5.8
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
5.9
Time behaviour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
5.10
Backward high-speed switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
5.11
Tap-changer running time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
5.12
Knx transformer mounting ratios and transformer connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
5.13
Setting the nominal current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.14
Inhibit low limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.15
Trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.16
Short description of individual limit values, setpoint values and permissible regulative deviation. 85
5.16.1
Description of the individual settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
6
Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.8
6.1.9
Station ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Station name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Setting the time/date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
LCD contrast (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Deleting recorder data (resetting the measured value memory). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Deleting tap-change sums (resetting the tap-counter to zero). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Actual value correction of the measuring voltage UE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Actual value correction of the measuring current IE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
6.2
RS-232 interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
6.2.1
6.2.2
COM 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
COM 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
6.3
E-LAN (Energy-Local Area Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
6.4
PAN-D voltage monitoring unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
6.5
Status (current ID data of the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring). . . 104
4
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7
Parameterisation of the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
7.1
Permissible regulative deviation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7.2
Time behaviour (regulation behaviour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
Time factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Trend memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
7.3
Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
7.3.1
7.3.2
1st setpoint value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Further setpoint values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
7.4
Programs (parameters for parallel regulation of transformers and for the compensation of the
voltage drop on the line) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
Selection of the parallel programs (regulation programs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters for the parallel program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Current influence (line-drop compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LDC parameter (line drop compensation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.5
Gradient (U/I characteristic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
7.6
Limitation (U/I characteristic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
7.7
< U Undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
7.8
> U Overvoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
113
114
116
116
7.9
> I, < Limit (upper and lower current limits). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.10
Trigger inhibit high (highest limit value of the voltage). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
7.11
High-speed switching during undervoltage/overvoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.11.1
7.11.2
High-speed switching when undervoltage occurs (RAISE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
High-speed switching when overvoltage occurs (LOWER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.12
REG-DA inhibit low when undervoltage occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
7.13
Time delays (limit signals). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
7.13.1
7.13.2
7.13.3
7.13.4
7.13.5
7.13.6
7.13.7
Time delay > U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time delay < U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time delay > I, < I limit value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time delay trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time delay forward high-speed switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time delay backward high-speed switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time delay inhibit low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REG-DA operating manual
121
122
122
122
123
123
124
5
REG-DA
7.14
Add-Ons (Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring behaviour) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
7.14.1
7.14.2
7.14.3
7.14.4
7.14.5
7.14.6
7.14.7
7.14.8
7.14.9
7.14.10
7.14.11
7.14.12
7.14.13
7.14.14
7.14.15
7.14.16
7.14.17
7.14.18
Overview of the Add-Ons menus numbers 1 to 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Maximum time TC in operation (motor-drive-in operation-time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Manual/Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Tap-changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Self-conduction of the operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Current display (of the transformer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
LCD saver (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Regulator mode: large display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Language selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Parallel Program Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Up/down relay on time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
AUTO(MATIC) LOCK in the event of an E-LAN error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Setpoint adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Creeping net breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Limit base (reference value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Setting the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring to inhibit low if <I or >I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Maximum tap difference (monitoring) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
ParaGramer activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
7.15
Transformer configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
7.15.1
7.15.2
7.15.3
7.15.4
7.15.5
Transformer mounting voltage (measurement voltage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Transformer mounting ratio for the voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Transformer mounting current (conductor connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Transformer mounting current (conversion 1 A / 5 A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Transformer mounting ratio for the current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
7.16
Input assignments (binary inputs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
7.17
Relay assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.18
LED assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
8
Measurement Value Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
8.1
Setting the simulated voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
8.2
Setting the simulated current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
8.3
Setting the simulated phase angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
8.4
Setting the simulated tap-change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
9
Parallel Operation of Transformers with REG-DA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
9.1
Circuit diagram (schematic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
9.2
Programs for parallel operation and their prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Preparing manual activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Preparing automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
9.3
Parallel operation using the “Master-Slave-Independent (MSI)” procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
9.3.1
Trouble-shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
6
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
10
Resistance Measuring Equipment for Tap-Changers with Resistance-Coded TapChange Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
10.1
Error detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
10.2
Level detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
10.3
Pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
10.4
Connection options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
10.5
Setting of the DIP switch S1 and S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
10.5.1
Location of the switch on the circuit board: level 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
11
mA-Inputs, mA-Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
11.1
Analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
11.2
Analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
12
Updating the Operating Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
12.1
Preparing the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
12.1.1
Windows NT/2000/XP operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
12.2
Starting the bootstrap loader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
13
Maintenance and Current Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
13.1
Cleaning information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
13.2
Changíng fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
13.3
Changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
13.4
REG-DA Current Consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
13.5
Replacing the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
14
Storage Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
15
Background Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
15.1
Regulator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
15.2
Command variable W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
15.2.1
15.2.2
15.2.3
Fixed command variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Variable command variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Current-dependent setpoint value increment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
15.3
Summary and Examples for Current Influencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
15.4
Regulative deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
15.4.1
15.4.2
15.4.3
15.4.4
Regulative deviation Xw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the regulative deviation Xw. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the permissible regulative deviation Xwz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
238
238
239
239
15.5
Monitoring extreme operating values (faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
15.5.1
Limit signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
REG-DA operating manual
7
REG-DA
15.6
Add-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
15.6.1
15.6.2
15.6.3
15.6.4
15.6.5
High-speed switching add-on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring inhibit low function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
Measuring the “Creeping Net Breakdown” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
“Maximum tap-change difference” monitoring Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Add-On: monitoring the tap-changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
15.7
Time behaviour of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring when a control command
is output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
15.7.1
15.7.2
15.7.3
15.7.4
15.7.5
Determining the reaction delay tv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Integrated time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
Trend memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
“Const” time program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Setting the time factor Ft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
15.8
E-LAN (Energy Local Area Network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
15.9
Voltage regulation with transformers operating in parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
15.9.1
15.9.2
15.9.3
15.9.4
15.9.5
Regulation programs for transformers operating in parallel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Functional principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Influence of the circulating current regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Activation of the regulation program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Description of the regulation programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
15.10 Nominal transformation of the measurement transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
15.11 Self-Conduct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
15.12 LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
15.12.1 LCD contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
15.12.2 LCD Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
15.12.3 Background illumination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
16
Definition of the Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
17
Symbols and their Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
18
Factory Settings of the Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
19
Notes on the Interpreter Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
20
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Appendix
Labels
Drill hole-pattern
8
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
1
Warnings and Information
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring is exclusively designed for implementation in
systems and equipment for electrical energy technology. Only
trained experts are permitted to carry out all required work.
Experts are persons who are familiar with the installation,
mounting, commissioning and operation of these types of
products. Furthermore, experts have qualifications which
correspond with the requirements of their field of work.
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring left the factory in a condition that fulfils all relevant
safety regulations. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe
operation, the following instructions and warnings in this
operating manual must be observed.
❑ The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring has been designed to comply with IEC 10110/
EN61010 (DIN VDE 0411), degree of protection I and was
tested according to this standard before delivery.
❑ The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring must be earthed via a protective earth
conductor. This condition is fulfilled when the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is connected to
an auxiliary voltage with a protective earth conductor
(European power supply system). If the auxiliary voltage
power supply system does not have a protective earth
conductor, an additional connection must be established
from the protective earth conductor terminal to earth.
❑ The upper limit of the permissible auxiliary voltage UAUX may
not be exceeded, neither permanently nor for a short period
of time.
❑ Before changing the fuse, separate the REG-DA Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring completely from
the auxiliary voltage UAUX.
The use of fuses other than those of the indicated type and
rated current is prohibited.
❑ A REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring which displays visible damage or clear
malfunctioning must not be used and has to be secured
against unintentionally being switched on.
REG-DA operating manual
9
REG-DA
❑ Maintenance and repair work on a REG-DA Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring with an open
door may only be carried out by authorised experts.
Warning signs
!
Please familiarise yourself with the nominal insulation voltage of
the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring before
connecting the device.
Ensure that the voltages are connected via a disconnecting
mechanism, and that the current path can be short circuited if
there is a device fault to enable problem-free device
replacement.
When wiring, please ensure that the conductors are either
bound short or kept sufficiently short so that they cannot reach
level 2 or 3.
If a fault occurs (connection becomes loose), no line that carries
a voltage that is dangerous when touched (> 50 V) or line to
which a nominal isolation voltage larger than 50 V is assigned,
may come into contact with the circuits in levels 2 and 3.
10
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
2
Scope of Delivery
1 REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring,
with built-in components
1 terminal diagram in English
1 operating manual in English
1 WinREG programming and parameterisation software
1 cable
1 replacement fuse
2 tools
(7 mm Allen key and special screwdriver for the terminals on
levels 2 and 3)
REG-DA operating manual
11
REG-DA
3
Technical Data
3.1
Basic equipment
Dimensions
Dimensions in mm
Lead sealing
Each Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can
be locked with a password so that the parameters cannot be
changed.
The REG-DA can also be lead-sealed to show whether it has
been opened by unauthorized persons.
For this purpose, a lead-sealing wire is pulled diagonally
through the bores in the lower right corner of the housing corner
and is secured with a lead-sealing tool.
This measure ensures that the device can only be opened by
breaking the lead seal.
12
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Membrane keypad
Connection levels
a r e a IIII I I
area
a r e a III I
area
a r e a II
area
Side view (section) of opened housing
Note
Reference is made to the connection levels (levels I...III)
in both the block diagram (Page 21) and the pin
assignment (Page 23).
REG-DA operating manual
13
REG-DA
3.2
Connection diagram
*
Please observe the contact load at R1 and R2!
(see below)!
**
The connections for I and U can be freely assigned
via the menu.
110 V DC
230 V AC
20 A Switch on
5 A @ cosϕ = 1
5 A Hold
3 A @ cosϕ = 0.4
0.4 A Switch off
Contact load R1, R2:
14
AC 250 V, 5 A, cosϕ = 1,
250 V DC, 150 W
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
3.3
Overview of features
REG-DA is a highly variable product.
The operating manual must take this factor into account and
provide different descriptions for the for the various
specifications.
Because the features ... M2, S1... D4 ... are noted on the name
plate of the device, but the relation to the function which it
stands for is not always given, the complete structure of the
device's features is listed here.
Feature:
ID
REG-DA
REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring
Basic version with E-LAN double interfaces,
COM 2, COM 3 and a mA input channel for e.g.
measuring the oil temperature
or for the measuring of the tap-changer position using
a measurement transducer
with 16 binary inputs and 12 relay outputs plus status
output
inclusive of WinREG parameterisation software for
parameterisation, programming
and displaying of all Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring data incl. connecting cable
Note: COM 2 is only freely accessible
if a log connection is not required.
Design
Panel-mounting or wall-mounting version
(H x W x D) 307 x 250 x 102 mm
with standard mounting rail adapter
B0
B1
Current supply
external
85 V ... 110 V ... 264 V AC / 88 V ... 220 V ... 280 V DC H0
external 18 V ... 60 V ... 72 V DC
H2
Input currents (can be changed later)
IEN 1A
IEN 5A
REG-DA operating manual
F1
F2
15
REG-DA
Feature:
ID
Measurement transducer display functions for network
quantities
Three-phase current with balanced load
Three-phase current with unbalanced load
Voltage (HV-side), current and voltage (MV-side)
measurement
Other uses of the three current and two voltage
transformers
16
M1
M2
M3
M9
Recorder functions
for network quantities with evaluation software
Without
With
S0
S1
Transformer monitoring
Without
With
T0
T1
Parallel operation
Without firmware for parallel operation
With firmware for parallel operation
K0
K1
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Feature:
Additional analogue inputs and outputs
Without
With one a PT 100 input
With two mA inputs
With two mA outputs
With one PT 100 input and one mA output
With two mA inputs and one mA output
With three mA outputs
Tap-change potentiometer input
Total resistance 200 Ohm ... 2 kOhm
Tap-change potentiometer input
Total resistance >2 kOhm ... 20 kOhm
Other combinations of inputs and outputs
ID
E00
E91
E92
E93
E94
E95
E96
E97
E98
E99
Note about E91 ... E99:
Please specify the scale if known!
Example: 1 -100 ... 0 ... +100 MW
-20 ... 0 ... +20 mA
Example: 2 0 ... 80 ... 120 V
4 ... 16 ... 20 mA
Example: 3 1 ... 19 levels
0 ... 20 mA
Example: 4 50 ... 140°C
4 ... 20 mA
REG-DA operating manual
17
REG-DA
Feature:
ID
Binary inputs and tap-changer potentiometer input
16 binary inputs 48 ... 250 V AC/DC
8 binary inputs 10 ... 48 V AC/DC
and 8 binary inputs 48 ... 250 V AC/DC
1 tap-change potentiometer input
(total resistance 200 ... 2 kOhm)
and 8 binary inputs 48 ... 250 V AC/DC
1 tap-change potentiometer input
(total resistance >2 ... 20 kOhm)
and 8 binary inputs 10 ... 48 V AC/DC
16 binary inputs 10 ... 48 V AC/DC
1 tap-change potentiometer input
(total resistance 200 ... 2 kOhm)
and 8 binary inputs 10 ... 48 V AC/DC
1 tap-change potentiometer input
(total resistance >2 ... 20 kOhm)
and 8 binary inputs 48 ... 250 V AC/DC
Level II: additional inputs and outputs
Without
With 6 binary inputs 48 ... 250 V AC/DC
With 12 binary inputs 48 ... 250 V AC/DC
With 6 relay outputs
With 12 relay outputs
With 6 binary inputs and 6 relay outputs
With 2 analogue inputs
With 4 analogue inputs
With 2 analogue outputs
With 4 analogue outputs
Other combinations 6 inputs, 6 outputs, 2 analogue
inputs, 2 analogue outputs
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
C00
C01
C02
C03
C04
C05
C06
C07
C08
C09
C90
Note about C90: Two terminals are normally available
on level II.
Each terminal can be equipped with either 6 binary
inputs, 6 binary outputs or an analogue module.
Either 2 inputs or 2 outputs are available per analogue
module.
Up to 4 additional modules can be equipped assuming
that a control system connection (XW90, 91 or L1, L9)
is not used.
18
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Feature:
ID
Integrated control system connection according to:
IEC61850 or IEC 60870- 5-104
XW00
Without
XW90
IEC 60850 - 5 - 104 (more in feature group “G”)
Note: Please specify the target system for connections
according to IEC 60850-5-104
IEC 61850 (more in feature group “G”)
XW91
Integrated control system connection according to: IEC
60870- 5-101/ ..-103,…DNP…
L0
Without (more in feature group “G”)
L1
for the control system connection of a REG-DA
For the control system connection of multiple systems L9
(REG-D/DA/DP, etc.)
Note: L9 can only be combined with feature XW90,
Z15 to Z19 and Z91.
Type of connection:
Copper RS 232
RS 485 only for 2-wire operation
Fibre-optic cable with FSMA connection system
Glass fibre
(Wavelength 800...900 nm, range 2000 m)
Plastic fibre
(Wavelength 620...680 nm, range 50 m)
Fibre-optic cable with ST connection system
Glass fibre
(Wavelength 800...900 nm, range 2000 m)
Plastic fibre
(Wavelength 620...680 nm, range 50 m)
REG-DA operating manual
V10
V11
V13
V15
V17
V19
19
REG-DA
20
Feature:
ID
Log:
IEC60870-5-103 for ABB
IEC60870-5-103 for Areva
IEC60870-5-103 for SAT
IEC60870-5-103 for Siemens (LSA/SAS)
IEC60870-5-103 for Sprecher Automation
IEC60870-5-103 for others
Z10
Z11
Z12
Z13
Z14
Z90
IEC60870-5-101 for ABB
IEC60870-5-101 for IDS
IEC60870-5-101 for SAT
IEC60870-5-101 for Siemens (LSA/SAS)
IEC60870-5-101 for others
Z15
Z17
Z18
Z19
Z91
DNP 3.00
LONMark
SPABUS
MODBUS RTU
Z20
Z21
Z22
Z23
Operating Manual
German
English
French
Spanish
Italian
Russian
Other
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G9
Display text
German
English
French
Spanish
Italian
Russian
Other
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A9
REG-DA operating manual
1
2 2
o p tio n a l
I
F 1
U
I
I
H
C h a r a c te r is tic M 2
U
C h a r a c te r is tic M 2
U
1
8
4
9
5
C h a r a c te r is tc E 9 1 ...9 9
3
7
2
6
+
6 3
A 1
-
6 4
+
6 1
A 2
-
6 2
+
6 5
A 3
111
-
6 6
+
6 7
A 4
D o p p e l- M o d u l
-
6 8
*
C T S
L C D
G N D
8 3
R x D
C O M 2
R S 2 3 2
8 6
8 2
T x D
T e r m in a l n o .
1 0 0
11
1 1 3
A d d itio n a l
In p u ts a n d o u tp u ts
8 1
C h a r a c te r is tic s C 0 1 ... C 0 9
( S e e p in a s s ig n m e n t
a re a II
1 2 8 x 1 2 8 D O T S
A n a lo q u e In p u ts a n d O u tp u ts
R X D
T e r m in a l n o .
A re a
n o t fr e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le
2 1
L / (-)
9
7
6
4
3
1
1 0
8
5
2
L / (+ )
I3
I2
U
I1
2
1
U
L e g e n d :
A re a
C T S
-
In p u t o r o u tp u t
R S 2 3 2
+
In p u t o r o u tp u t
R T S
8 4
R x -
8 0
R x +
7 8
7 7
1 3
7 2
1 8
1
2 5
11
8 4
3 0
3 2
2 9
F S M A
S T
IE C
D N P 3 .0
L O N
3 1
2 8
In p u ts E 9 ... E 1 6
d is p la y
2 7
2 4
8 3
IE C
L O N
D N P 3 .0
8 2
L E D
8 1
2 6
2 3
7 6
7 5
E -L A N
R
7 4
2 0
1 7
7 3
1 9
1 6
In p u ts E 1 ... E 8
1 5
1 2
7 1
E -L A N
L
7 0
R A M /R O M
µ P
1 4
1 1
6 9
K e y b o a rd
C L O C K
C O M 3
R S 4 8 5
7 9
T C in p r o g r e s s
E 1
8 5
p ro g r.
E 2
R T S
+
m A in p u t
-
In p u t o r o u tp u t
T x p ro g r.
E 3
G N D
+
In p u t o r o u tp u t
T x +
p ro g r.
T X D
-
m A in p u t
+
In p u t o r o u tp u t
-
In p u t o r o u tp u t
E +
A U T O
E 5
1
B C D 1
E 9
C O M
B C D 2
E 1 0
E G N D E 1 ...E 4
E 4
E A +
E A -
B C D 4
E -
M A N U A L
E 6
E B C D 8
E 1 1
E A +
p ro g r.
E 7
E +
G N D E 9 ...E 1 2
E 1 2
111
B C D 1 0
E 1 3
A re a
B C D 2 0
E 1 4
111
B C D s g n .
E 1 5
E A p ro g r.
E 8
E A +
p ro g r.
E 1 6
E +
G N D E 5 ...E 8
E A -
G N D E 1 3 ...E 1 6
R e la y o u tp u ts
A C / D C 4 8 ...2 5 0 V
R e la y o u tp u ts
A C / D C 4 8 ...2 5 0 V
5 6
5 5
5 4
5 9
5 8
5 7
5 3
4 7
4 8
4 9
5 0
5 1
5 2
4 6
4 5
4 4
4 3
4 2
4 1
4 0
3 9
3 8
3 7
R 1 2
R e m o te
lo w e r
p ro g r.
p ro g r.
p ro g r.
R 2
R 3
R 4
R 5
T e r m in a l n o .
h ig h e r
R 1
T C e rro r
R 7
R 6
< U
L o c a l
> U
R 1 0
R 8
> I
R 1 1
R 9
R 6 ...R 1 1
G N D
M a n u a l
A U T O
R 1 3
L ife c o n ta c t
(S ta tu s )
Block diagram for features D0/D1/D4
3 6
3.4.1
3 5
Block diagrams
3 4
3.4
3 3
REG-DA operating manual
1
A re a
A re a
REG-DA
21
1
2 2
L / (-)
o p tio n a l
I
I
F 1
U
I
H
C h a r a c te r is tic M 2
U
C h a r a c te r is tic M 2
U
n o t fr e e ly p r o g r a m m a b le
2 1
9
7
6
4
3
1
1 0
8
5
2
L / (+ )
I3
I2
U
I1
2
1
L e g e n d :
A re a
U
R X D
1
6
2
R T S
A re a
T e r m in a l n o .
3
8
4
9
5
6 3
+
A 1
6 4
-
C h a r a c te r is tc E 9 1 ...9 9
6 1
+
A 2
6 2
6 5
A 3
111
6 6
6 7
+
A 4
D o p p e l- M o d u l
+
C T S
8 4
R T S
L C D
8 5
G N D
8 3
C O M 2
R S 2 3 2
8 6
R x D
8 2
T x D
6 8
*
8 0
1 0 0
11
7 8
T x -
1 1 3
111
7 7
A re a
6 9
7 0
7 1
E -L A N
L
1 3
1 5
1 2
7 3
7 4
1
d is p la y
11
8 4
2 5
+
2 4
F S M A
S T
IE C
D N P 3 .0
L O N
2 6
R e s . In p u t
2 3
1 8
8 3
IE C
L O N
D N P 3 .0
8 2
L E D
8 1
2 0
1 7
7 6
1 9
1 6
7 5
E -L A N
R
In p u ts E 1 ... E 8
A C / D C 5 0 ...2 5 0 V
1 4
1 1
7 2
R A M /R O M
µ P
K e y b o a rd
C L O C K
C O M 3
R S 4 8 5
7 9
R x +
C h a r a c te r is tic s C 0 1 ... C 0 9
( S e e p in a s s ig n m e n t
a re a II
8 1
R x -
A d d itio n a l
In p u ts a n d o u tp u ts
1 2 8 x 1 2 8 D O T S
A n a lo q u e In p u ts a n d O u tp u ts
7
C T S
-
m A in p u t
R S 2 3 2
+
In p u t o r o u tp u t
1
-
In p u t o r o u tp u t
E -
A U T O
E 5
G N D
+
In p u t o r o u tp u t
E +
M A N U A L
E 6
C O M
In p u t o r o u tp u t
E A +
p ro g r.
A re a
T C in p r o g r e s s
E 1
E A p ro g r.
E 7
T X D
+
m A in p u t
+
In p u t o r o u tp u t
E p ro g r.
E 2
E -
E 8
T e r m in a l n o .
In p u t o r o u tp u t
E +
p ro g r.
E 3
E +
G N D E 5 ...E 8
T x +
T e r m in a l n o .
E A -
p ro g r.
E 4
E A -
I +
K
111
IK -
E A +
G N D E 1 ...E 4
E A +
E
U
R 5
T e r m in a l n o .
p ro g r.
p ro g r.
p ro g r.
lo w e r
R 2
R 3
h ig h e r
R 1
T C e rro r
R e m o te
R 6
< U
L o c a l
R 7
> U
R 1 0
R 8
> I
R 1 1
R 9
R 6 ...R 1 1
G N D
M a n u a l
A U T O
L ife c o n ta c t
(S ta tu s )
R 4
3 7
3 5
R e la y o u tp u ts
A C / D C 4 8 ...2 5 0 V
R e la y o u tp u ts
A C / D C 4 8 ...2 5 0 V
5 6
5 5
5 4
5 9
5 8
5 7
5 3
4 7
4 8
4 9
5 0
5 1
5 2
4 6
4 5
4 4
4 3
4 2
4 1
4 0
3 9
3 8
3 6
3 4
22
3 3
3.4.2
1
A re a
A re a
REG-DA
Block diagram for features D2/D3
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
3.5
Pin Assignment
Signals with non-exposed voltages are connected first of all on
level I.
All of the circuits on level I have a nominal insulation voltage of
> 50 V and are therefore considered to be non-exposed in
accordance with VDE 0110 (exception: resistance input,
feature D2/D3).
Please observe this condition even if small voltages are present
at the relay contacts or the binary inputs.
Terminal area on connection level III
Terminal area on connection level II
Terminal area on connection level I
REG-DA operating manual
23
REG-DA
No.
M1 *
2 Voltage input
U1
5 Voltage input
8 Voltage input
−
Level I
10 Voltage input
M2 *
UL1
UL2
UL3
−
Triple*wound
regulator
U1
U2
1k
3I
Current input I1
4k
6I
Current input I2
7k
9I
Current input I3
21 L / (+)
Auxiliary voltage
22 L / (-)
*) The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring with
feature M1 provides only one voltage input. One voltage
transformer is sufficient for standard regulating functions.
When carrying out measurements in arbitrarily-loaded threephase current systems, the three external-conductor voltages
must be connected to terminals 2, 5 and 8 (Feature M2).
Triple-wound applications function with two separate input
voltages U1 and U2.
24
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Level I
No.
D0, D1, D4
11 Input 1
Tap-changer in progress
12 Input 2
Freely programmable
13 Input 3
Freely programmable
14 Input 4
Freely programmable
15 Input 1...4
GND
16 Input 5
AUTO / MANUAL AUTO
(see Page 127)
17 Input 6
MANUAL
18 Input 7
Freely programmable
19 Input 8
Freely programmable
20 Input 5...8
GND
23 Input 9
BCD 1
24 Input 10
BCD 2
25 Input 11
BCD 4
26 Input 12
BCD 8
D2, D3
please also
refer to Page
34
27 Input 9...12
GND
−
28 Input 13
BCD 10
−
29 Input 14
BCD 20
−
30 Input 15
BCD signal
−
31 Input 16
Freely programmable
−
32 Input 13...16
GND
−
Note
All of the inputs and relay outputs are freely
programmable, with the exception of inputs 5 and 6 and
the outputs R1, R2, R12 and R13.
The assignment specified in the terminal diagram
corresponds to the delivery state and can be changed if
necessary.
REG-DA operating manual
25
REG-DA
No.
33
Freely programmable
R5
Freely programmable
R4
Freely programmable
R3
Lower
R2
Raise
R1
47
>I
R11
48
>U
R10
49
<U
R9
50
Local
R8
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
Level I
44
45
46
51
Remote
R7
52
TC Error
R6
53
GND
R6 ...R11
54
55
Life contact (status)
56
57
MANUAL
58
59
26
AUTO
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Level II
No.
IEC
LON
DNP 3.0
SPA bus
Modbus
For additional equipping possibilities for level II see "Pin
assignment level II" on page 35.
The connections of the control system can be found in the
information attached to the operating manual.
No.
63 mA input
+
64 mA input
-
61 Input or
output
+
62 Input or
output
-
65 Input or
output
+
A1 (standard equipment)
Level III
A2
65
A3
66 Input or
output
-
67 Input or
output
+
66
Pt100
A4
68 Input or
output
REG-DA operating manual
-
ϑ
68
27
REG-DA
No.
69 E70 E+
E-LAN (L)
71 EA72 EA+
73 E74 E+
E-LAN (R)
Level III
75 EA76 EA+
77 Tx +
78 Tx COM 3 (RS 485)
79 Rx +
80 Rx 81 du
don’t use
82 TxD
83 RxD
84 RTS
COM 2 (RS 232)
85 CTS
86 GND
28
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
3.5.1
Pin assignment level I
3.5.1.1 Auxiliary voltage, current input and voltage input
Terminals 21, 22 and 1 to 10
2
U
5
2
U
1 0
8
U
C h a r a c te r is tic M 2
3
1
I
4
I
I
H
U
C h a r a c te r is tic M 2
6
U
I1
I2
I3
7
9
2 1
F 1
L / (-)
L / (+ )
2 2
1
1
A re a
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring is equipped for carrying out measurements in
arbitrarily loaded three-phase current networks. Therefore, up
to three current transformers are available.
Voltage regulation generally only requires a single-phase
connection (one delta or phase voltage and one line current),
because it may be assumed that the network conditions at the
transformer are approximately symmetrical (feature M1).
If a more precise measurement of the outputs (P, Q, S) is
required, it is possible to switch over to the Aron circuit. In this
case, two voltages and two currents must be connected
(feature M2).
The third current input is reserved for special cases, which must
be coordinated before the device is delivered.
REG-DA operating manual
29
REG-DA
Auxiliary voltage (terminals 21 and 22)
The protective earth must be connected first, because the
REG-DA is a device with degree of protection I.
A plug-in shoe (6.3 x 0.8 mm) is provided in the lower part of
the housing for connecting the protective earth.
Flat-plug
connection
for protective
earth
The auxiliary voltage is supplied via the twin connector block
(terminals 21 and 22).
Two types of power supply units are available:
Therefore, please ensure that the intended supply voltage
corresponds to the auxiliary voltage of the device as stated on
the printed nameplate, before connecting.
Feature H0:
Both direct and alternating voltages may be connected.
Ranges:
88 V ... 220 V ... 280 V DC
85 V ... 110 V ... 264 V AC
Power consumption: < 15 VA
Feature H1:
18 V ... 60 V ... 72 V DC
Power consumption: < 10 W
The auxiliary voltage, and thus the power supply of the device,
is protected by a T2L 250 V microfuse.
The fuse holder can be opened with a screwdriver. The device
is supplied with a spare fuse.
30
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Note
Please note that the fuse catch should never be
screwed on without having a fuse inserted, because
otherwise it is difficult to open the fuse holder.
3.5.1.2 Control voltage
(Terminals 2, 5 and 8, 10)
The control voltage must be connected to the terminals 2 and
5.
Any voltage from the three-phase current network can be used
as the control voltage. The type of voltage (delta or phase
voltage, UL1L2, UL2L3, UL3L1, U1N, U2N, U3N) must be
communicated to the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring via the menu (SETUP 5, F2).
The permissible nominal application range of the control voltage
ranges from 60 to 140 V and is expressed in terms of delta
voltage.
If there is a connection between the phase and N, the nominal
application range of 34.6 to 140 V becomes available.
Please note that a single-pole high-resistance earth connection
affects L1 like a voltage dip if only a phase voltage (e.g. L1N) is
available for measuring the actual value of the voltage.
If a phase voltage is used as the control voltage rather than the
recommended delta voltage, you must pay attention to the
behaviour if a single-pole earth fault occurs.
In high-resistance faults, situations may occur where the
voltage appears to be too high or too low.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
generally switches itself into standby mode for low resistance
faults.
Strongly distorted signals may also be connected by means of
a complex filtering of the measurement voltages and the
measurement currents.
If feature M2 is used, voltage UL1 must be connected to terminal
2, voltage UL2 to terminal 5 and voltage UL3 to terminal 8.
i.e.:
UL1 → 2
UL2 → 5
UL3 → 8
REG-DA operating manual
31
REG-DA
Voltage inputs U1 and U2 are both available for triple-wound
applications.
In each case, this is a special version for the triple-wound
application, each of which is described separately.
3.5.1.3 Current inputs
(Terminals 1, 3 and 4, 6 and 7, 9)
A connection to a power supply is not required for normal
regulator operation.
In many cases, however, the voltage must be raised and/or
lowered according to the respective load.
It is necessary to connect the current transformer I1 (1 and 3)
to carry out this additional task.
However, even without current-dependent regulation, we
recommend connecting the current, because this means that
network can be measured and displayed in the measurement
transducer mode.
Ensure that the correct connection (k, l!) is used when
connecting the current transformer.
Two current transformers must be connected for carrying out
measurements in arbitrarily loaded three-phase networks.
The third current can be calculated on the basis of both of the
measured currents. The third current connection (4, 6) is
reserved for special cases, which will be described separately.
The changeover from 1 A to 5 A or vice-versa is accomplished
via the menu. The use of hardware such as a bridge or jumper
is not necessary.
Caution!
Please observe that the line(s) must be short-circuited
before releasing the lines on terminals 1/3, 4/6 and 7/9.
32
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
3.5.1.4 Relay outputs
(Terminals 33 ... 59)
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring has 13 relays.
Relay 13 is used as a life contact and monitors the running of
the processor as well as the supply voltages of the system.
Relays 1 ... 12 are available for regulating and controlling the
transformer.
Relays R1, R2 and R12 are permanently assigned to specific
functions, whereas all of the other relays are freely
programmable. The relays are programmed with frequently
used functions when delivered.
5 9
5 4
A U T O
5 8
5 5
5 6
L ife c o n ta c t
(S ta tu s )
R 1 1
M A N U A L
G N D
5 7
> I
5 3
R 6 ...R 1 1
4 7
R 9
4 8
R 1 0
4 9
> U
5 0
R 8
5 1
R e la y - o u tp u ts
/ D C 4 8 ...2 5 0 V
< U
5 2
L o c a l
4 6
R 6
4 5
R 7
4 4
R e m o te
4 3
T C fa u lt
4 2
R 1
4 1
R a is e
4 0
R 2
3 9
L o w e r
3 8
R 3
3 7
p ro g r.
3 6
R 4
3 5
R 5
3 4
A C
p ro g r.
3 3
R e la y - o u tp u ts
/ D C 4 8 ...2 5 0 V
p ro g r.
T e r m in a l n o .
A C
1
A re a
R1 ... R13:
Load:
Potential-free relay contacts
250 V AC, 5 A, cosϕ = 1,
250 V DC, 150 W (also refer to
Page 14)
Relays R1 and R2 may be switched as follows in order to lock
a control command:
R1
R2
Raise
REG-DA operating manual
Lower
33
REG-DA
3.5.1.5 Binary inputs, feature D0/D1
(Terminals 11 ... 32)
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring has 16 binary inputs.
A re a
2 0
s g n .
B C D
E 9 ...E 1 2
1 0
8
4
B C D
B C D
B C D
B C D
p ro g r.
E 1 3 ...E 1 6
E 1 1
E 1 2
G N D
E 1 3
E 1 4
E 1 5
E 1 6
G N D
1
2
B C D
B C D
E 1 0
E 8
G N D
p ro g r.
p ro g r.
E 7
E 9
M A N U A L
E 6
E 5 ...E 8
E 1 ...E 4
p ro g r.
A U T O
G N D
E 5
E 4
T C
E 1
p ro g r.
2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 3 0 3 1 3 2
p ro g r.
1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0
E 3
In p u ts E 9 ... E 1 6
E 2
In p u ts E 1 ... E 8
in p r o g r e s s
T e r m in a l n o .
Only inputs 5 and 6 (Manual/Automatic) are permanently
assigned. All of the other inputs can be programmed freely.
Frequently used input functions are already assigned to some
of the inputs when it is delivered (see table on page 24 to page
26).
1
3.5.1.6 Binary inputs and resistance inputs
for tap-change potentiometer (D2/D3)
(Terminals 11 ... 26)
Only binary inputs 5 and 6 (Manual/Automatic) are permanently
assigned. All of the other binary inputs can be programmed
freely. Frequently used input functions are already assigned to
some of the inputs when it is delivered (see table on Page 24 to
Page 26).
Feedback of the tap-change position is often sent back to the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring as a BCD
code.
The binary inputs are parameterised to correspond with the
number of steps in this case (see "Binary inputs, feature D0/D1"
on page 34, terminals 23 to 32).
34
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
If the tap-change position is supplied as a resistance value (e.g.
10 Ohm / tap-change position), the resistance module can be
connected directly to terminals 23 to 26.
2 5
2 6
-
2 4
E
G N D E 5 ...E 8
-
IK -
p ro g r.
2 3
+
U
2 0
IK +
1 9
p ro g r.
G N D E 1 ...E 4
1 8
E 8
E 4
1 7
M A N U A L
p ro g r.
p ro g r.
p ro g r.
E 3
1 6
E 7
1 5
A U T O
1 4
E 6
1 3
R e s . In p u t
E 5
1 2
E 2
T e r m in a l n o .
1 1
T C in p r o g r e s s
In p u ts E 1 ... E 8
/ D C 5 0 ...2 5 0 V
E 1
A C
1
A re a
For further information see "Resistance Measuring Equipment
for Tap-Changers with Resistance-Coded Tap-Change
Signalling" on page 187:
3.5.2
Pin assignment level II
Level II is not equipped in the standard version of the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring.
However, a larger number of additional inputs and outputs can
be provided via this connection level if additional binary or
analogue inputs/outputs are required.
The equipment changes according to features C01 to C99.
A total of four different modules are available, that can be used
in any combination if required.
Module 1: 6 binary inputs
Module 2: 6 relay outputs
Module 3: 2 mA inputs
Module 4: 2 mA outputs
The connection assignment of the individual features can be
found in the terminal diagram.
REG-DA operating manual
35
REG-DA
Feature C01
6 additional binary inputs 48 ... 250 V AC/DC
Module 1
No.
100
Binary input
E17
101
Binary input
E18
102
Binary input
E19
103
Binary input
E20
104
Binary input
E21
105
Binary input
E22
106
GND
E17 ... E22
Feature C02
12 additional binary inputs 48 ... 250 V AC/DC
Module 1
Module 1
No.
36
100
Binary input
E17
101
Binary input
E18
102
Binary input
E19
103
Binary input
E20
104
Binary input
E21
105
Binary input
E22
106
GND
E17 ... E22
107
Binary input
E23
108
Binary input
E24
109
Binary input
E25
110
Binary input
E26
111
Binary input
E27
112
Binary input
E28
113
GND
E23 ... E28
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Feature C03
6 additional relay outputs (NO contacts)
Module 2
No.
100
R14
101
R15
102
R16
103
R17
104
R18
105
R19
106
GND R14 ... R19
Feature C04
12 additional relay outputs (NO contacts)
Module 2
Module 2
No.
100
R14
101
R15
102
R16
103
R17
104
R18
105
R19
106
GND R14 ... R19
107
R20
108
R21
109
R22
110
R23
111
R24
112
R25
113
GND R20 ... R25
REG-DA operating manual
37
REG-DA
Feature C05
6 additional binary inputs 48 ... 250 V AC/DC and
6 relay outputs (NO contacts)
Module 2
Module 1
No.
100
Binary input
E17
101
Binary input
E18
102
Binary input
E19
103
Binary input
E20
104
Binary input
E21
105
Binary input
E22
106
GND
E17 ... E22
107
R14
108
R15
109
R16
110
R17
111
R18
112
R19
113
GND R14 ... R19
Feature C06
2 additional analogue inputs
No.
Module 3
100
101
E10
-
102
+
Analogue input
103
38
+
Analogue input
E11
-
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Feature C07
4 additional analogue inputs
No.
Module 3
100
+
Analogue input
101
102
+
Analogue input
103
E11
-
104
Module 3
E10
-
+
Analogue input
105
E12
-
106
+
Analogue input
107
E13
-
Feature C08
2 additional analogue outputs
No.
Module 4
100
+
Analogue output
101
A10
-
102
+
Analogue output
103
A11
-
Feature C09
4 additional analogue outputs
No.
Module 4
100
+
Analogue output
101
102
+
Analogue output
103
A11
-
104
Module 4
A10
-
+
Analogue output
105
A12
-
106
+
Analogue output
107
REG-DA operating manual
A13
-
39
REG-DA
The hardware for all the control system connections is also
contained on level II.
The corresponding connection elements on level II must be
used for RS232 or RS485 connections.
If the Ethernet connection is used (required for IEC 61850 or
IEC 60870-5-104 connections!), the corresponding connection
is also accessible on level II.
Please refer to the configuration documentation supplied with
this operating manual, since the terminal assignment can be
very different for the individual interfaces.
The connection elements for fibre-optic cables (send and
receive diodes as ST or FSMA connection) are mounted directly
on the flange plate and can be connected there without
opening the device.
Fibre-optic cable connection
(FSMA-connection system)
40
Fibre-optic cable connection
(ST-connection system)
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
3.5.3
Pin assignment level III
It is possible to access interfaces COM 1, COM 2 and COM 3
via level III.
The connection elements for the E-LAN transport bus and
certain combinations of analogue inputs and outputs (Features
E91 to E99) are also available via level III.
Interface COM 1
Function
Pin
DCD
1
RXD
2
TXD
3
DTR
4
Signal-Ground
5
DSR
6
RTS
7
CTS
8
RI
9
R S 2 3 2
G N D
T X D
R T S
R X D
C O M
C T S
111
A re a
1
1
2
6
3
7
4
8
REG-DA operating manual
5
9
41
REG-DA
8 0 7 9 7 8 7 7
C O M 2
R S 2 3 2
C O M 3
R S 4 8 5
COM 2, suitable for
connecting:
- Modem
- PC
- DCF 77
- E-LAN-L
- E-LAN-R
E
E A
E A
+
E
E A
-
+
E A
E
E
T x +
T x -
R x +
R x -
T x D
R x D
G N D
R T S
8 5 8 4 8 6 8 3 8 2 8 1
-
+
T e r m in a l n o .
C T S
-
+
111
A re a
6 9 7 0 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6
E -L A N
L
E -L A N
R
COM 3, only suitable
for connecting BIN-D
and ANA-D interface
components!
C h a r a c te r is tc E 9 1 ...9 9
A n a lo q u e In p u ts a n d O u tp u ts
+
6 6
6 7
A 4
6 8
In p u t o r o u tp u t
+
In p u t o r o u tp u t
111
*
-
-
-
6 5
+
In p u t o r o u tp u t
m A in p u t
+
m A in p u t
A r e a
6 2
A 3
+
6 1
+
In p u t o r o u tp u t
6 4
-
In p u t o r o u tp u t
+
In p u t o r o u tp u t
6 3
-
-
+
A 2
-
T e r m in a l n o .
D o p p e l- M o d u l
A 1
optional
Equipping analogue inputs is dependent on the selected
structure of the features.
Both mA inputs and mA outputs may be implemented.
A module can be supplied for measuring the oil temperature
(transformer monitoring), which can be directly attached to a PT
100.
The connection is designed as a three-conductor circuit and
can be used over a distance of approximately 100 m.
The inputs can operate continuously in a short-circuited or
open state. All inputs are electrically isolated from all of the other
42
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
circuits. The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring is equipped with one analogue input as standard.
The type of use can be specified at the time of ordering, or a
specific measurement quantity can be assigned using WinREG
or the device's keyboard.
The outputs can operate continuously in a short-circuited or
open state. All outputs are electrically isolated from all of the
other circuits.
REG-DA operating manual
43
REG-DA
3.6
Types of REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring
3.6.1
Wall-mounting version
Mounting bars
Dimensions in mm
The mounting bars provided must be screwed onto the rear of
the device.
The entire unit must be attached with suitable screws to/onto a
stable mounting surface.
If the mounting holes are drilled laterally, both mounting bars
can also be folded inwards (see shaded area).
Note
Please note and use the enclosed hole pattern (last
page).
44
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
3.6.2
Panel-mounting version
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
After the cutout has been cut in the mounting panel, the four
grub screws (1) must be screwed into the bottom of the
housing. The device is then pushed through the cutout and is
fixed with the two clamping angles (2).
In general, it is advisable to remove the flange plate first, then
push the housing through the cutout.
REG-DA operating manual
45
REG-DA
3.6.3
Mounting on Standard Mounting Rails
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can
also be mounted on 35 mm standard mounting rails.
46
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
4
Operation
4.1
Display and control elements
LCD display
LED
Field 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Function keys
LED
Field 7
Label strips
Field
Parameterisation
Indicators
Label
Field
Transformer control
The MPC operation level (people-process communication) of
the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
is implemented as a membrane keypad with integrated lightemitting diodes (LEDs).
Indicators and labels
Seven labels are available. Each label is designed for two
signals (2 LEDs).
The labelling of each individual field may be changed at any time
by pulling the label strip downwards out of the clear vinyl
pocket.
REG-DA operating manual
47
REG-DA
Note
Further label strips can be found in Annex 2.
A program for generating label strips called
Beschriftungsprogramm.xls can be found on the program
CD.
If you have a colour printer at your disposal, the
individual fields can even be printed in colour (yellow and
red).
Any standard pen can be used to write on the labels.
Indicator 1 is programmed as default and cannot be changed.
➪ LED 1 in field 1 (green) lights up when the device is
operating fault-free (service).
➪ LED 2 in field 1 (red) lights up when the device has a fault
(blocked).
➪ The LEDs in field 2 to field 5 (yellow) are freely
programmable for general signalling, and are not
programmed when delivered.
➪ The LEDs in field 6 to field 7 (red) are freely programmable.
They are primarily intended for fault signals and are not
programmed when delivered.
Transformer control panel
7 keys are assigned to the transformer control panel.
The “AUTOMATIC”
key with an integrated green LED
lights up when the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring is functioning in the Automatic operating mode.
The “Manual”
key with integrated red LED lights up
when the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
functioning in the manual mode.
The arrow keys “Raise”
and “Lower”
can be used to manually select the taps of the transformer.
Prerequisite: The “LOCAL”
key (red)
is activated.
All remote control commands via binary inputs or a serial
connection are suppressed when in the “LOCAL” setting.
Remote control is only possible in the “REMOTE” mode (green).
48
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring was designed in such a way that all of the display
elements of the transformer control panel (“Manual/Auto” and
“Local/Remote”) have to be green when the operating
personnel leave the control room.
The “ACK”
key is currently still out of operation.
In the future, this key will be able to be used to acknowledge
process signals and/or fault signals which the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring generates itself and indicates
in the display.
Parameterisation panel
The keys in the parameterisation panel can be used to manually
parameterise the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring.
The “Menu”
key is used to switch between the various
operating modes and to select a specific parameterization
menu (SETUP 1 ... SETUP 6)
The “Return”
key is used to confirm a specific
parameter in the SETUP menus.
Note
Changes to the parameterisation which are important
for operation can only be carried out in the manual
operating mode.
The “Esc”
key is used to exit any menu. The user can
move the cursor within the parameterisation menus using the
and
keys.
Function keys
The function keys, “F1”
to “F5”
implemented as so-called softkeys.
, are
The function of the keys is context-controlled and depends on
the corresponding menu.
REG-DA operating manual
49
REG-DA
4.1.1
Display
LCD display
Address at bus (station identification)
Relay name
Time
Identification line
Status line
„ACTUAL VALUE” in capital letters
= measurement simulation is running
Setpoint value in
Setpoint value in
Actual value in V/
„ACTUAL VALUE” in small letters
= measurement simulation is off
regulative deviation
Progress bar (when active)
er is transparent when the regulative deviation is lower than the permissible regulative deviation.
pointer is black when the regulative deviation is higher than the permissible regulative deviation.
Backwards high-speed switching is indicated by “<--<”
LCD Display Recorder Mode
Address at bus (station identification)
Relay name
Time
Identification line
Back
Forward
Present voltage
Menu recorder
Feedrate
speed
Present feedrate speed
(14s / scale section)
Present voltage
Scale
Tap-change
Date
Time
Set permissible
regulative deviation
Present voltage
50
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
4.2
Operating principle
The operation of the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring is completely menu-guided and the
principle is the same for each item in the “SETUP” menu.
The following operating principle applies for setting or changing
the regulation parameters:
➪ “MANUAL OPERATING MODE”
changes the operating mode to
manual operation
➪ “MENU”
displays the list of operating modes
➪ “MENU”
selects the “SETUP” menu item
➪ “MENU”
can be used to scroll through the pages of
the “SETUP” menu selection until the required parameter
appears on the display.
➪ Select a parameter via the corresponding function key
(“F1” ... “F5”).
➪ Set the value of the parameter via the function keys.
“F1”
increases the value in large steps
“F2”
increases the value in small steps
“F4”
increases the value in small steps
“F5”
decreases the value in large steps
➪ “F3”
has a special function in some of the “SETUP”
menus.
➪ After entering a value, the changed value is confirmed by
pressing “RETURN”
.
➪ If the entry is protected with a password, enter the
password (see "Password request" on page 95).
➪ Return or leave the “SETUP” menus
“ESC (CANCEL)”
➪ The “SETUP” menus will be automatically exited if no key is
pressed for approx. 15 seconds.
REG-DA operating manual
51
REG-DA
➪ The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring can be switched back to the automatic
operating mode using “AUTO”
once the required
parameters are entered, checked and individually
confirmed by pressing the “RETURN”
key.
4.3
Selecting the display mode
The display modes of the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring can be selected after pressing the
“MENU”
key.
The following modes are available:
❑ Regulator Mode
❑ Measurement transducer mode
❑ Recorder mode
❑ Statistics mode (Monitor mode)
❑ ParaGramer mode
Regulator Mode
➪ The “F1”
key is used to select the “Regulator
Mode”.
The display indicates the set setpoint
value in V (kV) and as a percentage of
the nominal voltage, the momentary
actual value, the value of the
permissible regulative deviation and the
present tap-changer position of the
tap-changing transformer.
The present deviation of the setpoint is
also indicated on a scale (by an
analogue pointer) with a bandwidth of ± 10%.
➪ The colour of the scale’s pointer changes from transparent
to black if the specified permissible regulative deviation is
overshot or undershot.
52
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
If required, the present value of the current may also be
displayed.
Note
If “Actual Value” is displayed in capital letters, i.e.
“ACTUAL VALUE”, then the “MEASUREMENT VALUE
SIMULATION” is active!
(see Page 146).
➪ The “F2”
key is used to select the “Measurement
Transducer Mode”.
Measurement
transducer
mode
When the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
carries out measurements in the Aron circuit (feature M2), a
second measurement transducer screen can be selected to
display the measured values of the three-phase current
networks loaded according to the requirements of the user.
Note
In the measurement transducer mode, only the reactive
current I sinϕ of each transformer will be displayed.
However, it is not possible to determine on the basis of
this display which share of the current pertains to the
load and which pertains to the reactive current.
The second measurement transducer screen can be selected
by pressing either the
REG-DA operating manual
or
key.
53
REG-DA
The third transducer screen may be selected by pressing either
the
or
key.
If the device is switched in parallel, it is advantageous to display
the circulating reactive current as well.
The circulating current Icirc provides information about the
share of the current that is “circulating” in the parallel-switched
transformers and not taken up by the load.
The quasi-analogue scale illustrates the relationship between
the circulating reactive current “Icirc” and the permissible
circulating reactive current “perm. Icirc”.
If the permissible Icirc is 50 A, the circulating reactive current
Icirc is actually -100 A and the value -2 is shown on the scale.
If the circulating current becomes zero, the quotient will also
become zero and the pointer will be positioned in the middle of
the scale.
However, generally speaking, this ideal situation can in practice
only then be reached when the parallel-switched transformers
exhibit the same electrical features.
Recorder mode
➪ The “F3”
key is used to select the “Recorder
Mode”.
As standard, every Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring is
equipped with a DEMO recorder
(feature: DEMO in the lower left corner
of the grid).
Above the grid, the set permissible
regulative deviation is displayed by
means of two black arrows. In this
manner, the recorder display is capable
54
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
of supplying all of the information needed for operating the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring (see "LCD
Display Recorder Mode" on page 50).
In addition to the value of the present voltage and the tapchanger position (in the lower left-hand corner), the display also
indicates the permissible regulative deviation (black arrows
above the grid) and the change of the voltage over a period of
time (past values).
Within the grid, the present voltage is the value which intersects
the lower line of the two parallel border lines at the top of the
grid.
Independent of the selected feedrate speed (F4), the memory
stores values at a constant rate of 1 second.
Each 1 second value is composed of 10 100ms values.
Seven scale divisions are available in total on the display. Thus,
a maximum time range of 7 x 10 minutes (70 minutes) may be
shown on the screen.
The shortest time range with the biggest optical resolution is 7
x 14 seconds (98 seconds).
Apart from the voltage, the recorder can also record the current
and the angle ϕ. The tap-changer position and the setpoint
value with tolerance band are always recorded as well.
In the second recorder menu (F3-F3), the desired mode can be
selected via the menu item “Number of channels” (F4). It is
possible to change modes at any time without loss of data.
Displaying the recorder data
In the first recorder menu (F3), the menu item “Dual Display” (F4)
can be used to switch the recorder display between the onechannel display of U and the two-channel display. The left
channel is always reserved for the control voltage U. The Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring offers a selection
of measurement quantities for the second channel (see 2nd
recorder menu).
The time axis is the same for both curves. Only the resolution of
the left channel can be changed using the “dx” (F5 key); the
scale of the second channel remains the same.
REG-DA operating manual
55
REG-DA
Derived variables from the recorder data
In the first recorder menu (F3,F3), the
menu item “MMU display” (F5) can be
used to switch the display of variables
derived from the present cursor value
(at the very top) on and off.
I and S are displayed as numeric values
if only two recorder channels (U + I)
have been selected (second recorder
menu (F3, F3, F4)).
If all three recorder channels (U + I + ϕ) are activated, then I, ϕ,
P and Q will be displayed as numeric values.
It is also possible to search for an event in the second recorder
menu. If both the date and the time of a certain event are
known, a specific day and time can be selected in the “Time
Search” submenu.
After returning to the recorder main menu (by pressing F3 or
Enter), the recorder lists the selected time and displays all of the
electrical measurement values as well as the corresponding
tap-changes.
Statistics mode
➪ The “F4”
key is used to select the “Statistics
Mode”.
The total number of tap-changes made
since the counter was last set to zero is
shown on the display. Thus tapchanges made under load and tapchanges made with a load of less than
5% of the nominal current In (1 A or 5 A)
are distinguishable.
Changes made under load are
additionally displayed for each tapchange.
Note
If the tap-changer is working under load (I > 0.05 ⋅ In), a
double arrow >> indicates the present tap-changer
position.
If the load condition is not fulfilled, the present tapchanger position will be indicated by a single arrow “>”.
In conjunction with the recorder, the statistics mode provides
valuable information regarding the controlled system.
56
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The parameters “Time factor” and “Permissible regulative
deviation” can be used to reach an optimum between the
voltage stability and the number of tap-changes. However, this
relation cannot be calculated mathematically as it is subject to
the individual conditions at the respective feeding point.
➪ “F5”
ParaGramer
selects “ParaGramer mode”.
The ParaGramer is a tool used for
automatically preparing parallel
connections and for the one-line
display of the switching status.
The artificial word ParaGramer is
derived from the terms
parallel and one-line diagram.
The ParaGramer displays the switching
status of the individual transformers in one-line graphics and
can be loaded by pressing the F5 key in the main menu.
The function is activated by feeding a complete busbar replica
(positions of the circuit breakers, disconnectors, bus ties and
bus couplings) into each Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring by means of binary inputs.
On the basis of the switching statuses, the system can
independently recognise which transformer should work in
parallel operation with which other transformer(s) on a busbar.
The system treats busbars connected via bus couplings as one
single busbar.
As shown in the graphic, both transformers T1 and T3 are
working on busbar “a”, whereas transformer T2 is feeding on
busbar “b”.
If special crosslinks are needed
between the busbars, we recommend
that you contact the headquarters of
our company A. Eberle GmbH & Co.
KG for assistance, since it is not
possible to describe all the options in
this operating manual.
Crosslink
The “crosslinks” feature is depicted in
the graphic. With its assistance, two
busbars may be coupled crosswise.
REG-DA operating manual
57
REG-DA
Setup menus
➪ “MENU”
4.4
selects the “SETUP” menü 1
Lamp check
➪ Press the “F5” key to check the functions of the lightemitting diodes on the front panel. Select “F5”
.
Note
This check can only be carried out in the “Regulator
Mode” or “Statistics Mode”.
4.5
Resetting fault signals
To reset fault signals that occur, the operating mode must be
changed from AUTOMATIC to MANUAL and then back to
AUTOMATIC again.
4.6
Operating the recorder
Time reference line
“F1”
and “F2”
allow access to historical values.
The time and date corresponding to a particular event can be
found by setting the voltage-time diagram back to the timereference line (beginning of the grid at the top) using the “F1”
and “F2”
keys. The time, date, voltage value and
tap-changer position can then be read below the grid.
If historical data is displayed, the term “HIST” appears in the
lower left-hand corner of the grid. Display of past measurement
values may be aborted at any time by pressing the “ESC
(CANCEL)”
key.
Press “F3”
to go to the recorder 1 menu. The scroll
displacement for searching using the “F1”
and
58
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
“F2”
keys (in recorder mode) can be set using the “scroll”
menu item. This helps to speed up the search procedure. It is
also possible to switch back and forth between “Dual Display”
and “MMU display” in the Recorder -1 menu.
Pressing the “F3”
key in the Recorder -1 menu will take
you to the Recorder -2 menu. In this menu a specific search
date and time can be set under the menu item “Time Search”.
The type of display (U, U+I, U+I+Phi, U+U2, U+OilT, U+WndT)
can be selected under the menu item “Channel Display”.
The time-line diagram for the selected point in time appears
after returning to the recorder mode again by pressing “F3”
.
The Recorder 1 and Recorder 2 menus display the present
memory capacity status in “%” as well as in “days”.
Õ
Õ
Õ
Õ
Õ
REG-DA operating manual
Õ
59
REG-DA
Õ
Õ
Õ
Õ
Õ
Õ
Õ
Õ
The feedrate speed can be selected by pressing the “F4”
key. Four different times can be selected: 14 s, 1 min, 5 min, 10
min.
60
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The “dt” values refer to the time which must pass before a scale
section (division) is recorded.
1 division
dT = 14s
dT = 1m
dT = 5m
dT = 10m
The scale of the 1st channel can be changed using the
“F5”
“dx” key.
An extension of WinREG permits the data to be read out.
The data may be archived on the PC from firmware version 1.78
onwards.
The evaluation program can also generate data records that
can be read by MS EXCEL.
Note
If the note “DEMO” appears in the lower left-hand
corner of the grid of the regular recorder display, the
recorder is operating in demo mode. In this operating
mode, the recorder only records the measured values
for a period of 4 - 6 hours. After this period, the older
values are replaced by the new ones.
REG-DA operating manual
61
REG-DA
62
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
5
Commissioning
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring is a complex device with many functions.
This variety of functions necessitates a comprehensive
operating manual.
It was considered whether it was better to fill the individual
screenshots with all the theoretical information, or whether it is
better to separate the two parts by summarising the
background information and guiding the reader through the
individual screens.
We finally decided to offer two separate parts with the
corresponding cross-references.
However, in order to make it as easy as possible to start the
parameterisation without constantly having to jump between
two sections, we have inserted a commissioning section which
enables a standard voltage regulation to be carried out step-bystep.
Thus we based the description on the most important functions
of voltage regulation.
A summary of the limit values with a short explanation and links
to the appropriate chapters can be found on Page 85
Whilst the parameterisation can be implemented using the
WinREG parameterisation program, this chapter only deals with
parameterisation using the device keypad.
The parameters that are particularly important for voltage
regulation will be briefly mentioned in seven steps and the
parameterisation explained.
Further settings that are required in special cases can be found
in chapter 7.
After applying the operating voltage, the
REG-DA will indicate that it is in regulator mode.
Other modes, such as measurement transducer mode,
recorder mode, statistics mode and ParaGramer mode, can be
selected at any time.
REG-DA operating manual
63
REG-DA
Therefore it is important to realise that all modes run parallel to
each other in the background. If one selects the recorder mode
(for example), the regulating tasks and all the other
parameterised task settings will also naturally be processed.
Press MENU and then use the keys
F2 ... F5 to select the desired mode.
The individual operating modes are briefly described below.
In total, six SETUPs are designed for the parameterisation.
You can scroll through the individual SETUPs in the following
manner:
Starting at the main menu (regulator, measurement transducer,
recorder, statistics or ParaGramer), press MENU to enter
SETUP 1.
Repeatedly pressing the MENU key selects SETUP 2 to SETUP
6.
If you are already in one of the SETUPs, you can reach all the
other menus by pressing the ← and → keys.
Caution!
Please observe the “Warnings and Notes” on Page 9
without fail!
64
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
5.1
Regulator mode
After the auxiliary voltage is applied, the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring indicates that it is in regulator
mode.
The important parameters for assessing a regulation situation
are shown in this display mode.
The tap-changer position and the present regulative deviation
are shown in addition to the actual voltage value. The present
regulative deviation is shown in quasi-analogue form.
If the pointer is at “0” the actual value is the same as the
setpoint value. If the regulative deviation is within the tolerance
range the pointer is transparent. If the regulative deviation is
outside the permissible regulative deviation the pointer changes
to black.
In this way one can judge the present condition of the controlled
system at a glance.
An alternative display with additional information − the compact
display − can be selected using the F1 key.
In addition to the actual value and the tap-changer position, the
setpoint value in V (kV) and % as well as the permissible
regulative deviation in % are shown in this display.
If you prefer the large display, simply press the F1 key again.
REG-DA operating manual
65
REG-DA
5.2
Measurement transducer mode
Press MENU and then select the measurement transducer
mode using the F2 key.
Various important measurement quantities are shown in this
mode.
The voltage, current and frequency are independent of the
connection of the measurement quantities, whereas the
outputs can only be displayed correctly when the measurement
sources are correctly entered.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring with
feature M1 only gives exact measurement values in equally
loaded 3-phase networks. In this case, the measurement
transducer emanates from a symmetrical loading of all lines,
and measures only one current and one voltage.
For this reason, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring must know the source of the voltages (L1L2, L2L3,
L3L1) and currents (L1, L2, L3) in order to be able to take the
angle between the input quantities into consideration.
If measurements are to be taken in a 3-phase network loaded
according to the requirements of the user, the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring must be equipped with
feature M2.
Note
66
The I x sin ϕ current is particularly important for parallelswitching transformers.
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
5.3
Recorder mode
The measured line voltage and the tap-changing position are
recorded in Recorder mode.
Each second a measurement value that is the arithmetic
average of 10 100ms measurements is stored in the memory
for the voltage.
The memory capacity is more than 18.7 days, although this
time is only valid when each value measured per second differs
from the value recorded the previous second.
In practice the memory usage is such that at least a month of
data can be saved.
The saved values can either be recalled using the keypad, or
transferred to a PC and analysed there using the WinREG
parameterisation program (e.g. with Excel).
REG-DA operating manual
67
REG-DA
5.4
Statistics mode
In statistics mode, tap-changes under load and tap-changes
when idling are differentiated and recorded separately.
The load condition is fulfilled if a current is measured that is 5%
larger than the entered nominal value.
(Example: for In = 1 A → 50 mA; for In = 5 A → 250 mA).
Under load conditions every tap-change is recorded and
displayed.
A double arrow before a particular change indicates that the
transformer is running under load and is on the displayed level.
A single arrow signals that the transformer is idling.
68
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
5.5
ParaGramer mode
The ParaGramer is a support tool for the automatic preparation
of parallel connections and the online display of the switching
statuses.
The artificial word ParaGramer is derived from the terms parallel
and one-line diagram.
The ParaGramer displays the switching status of the individual
transformers in one-line graphics and can be loaded by
pressing the F5 key in the main menu.
The function is activated by feeding a complete busbar replica
(positions of the circuit breakers, disconnectors, bus ties and
bus couplings) into each Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring by means of binary inputs.
On the basis of the switching statuses, the system can
independently recognise which transformer should work in
parallel operation with which other transformer(s) on a busbar.
Busbars that are connected via bus coupling(s) are treated as
one single busbar by the system.
As shown in the graphic, both transformers T1 and T3 are
working on busbar “a”, whereas transformer T2 is feeding on
busbar “b”.
REG-DA operating manual
69
REG-DA
5.6
Choosing the language
Please select SETUP 5, F1, F1
Press F5 to view all of the selectable languages.
2x
Õ
Õ
Select the desired language with F2 or F4 and confirm the
selection using F3.
5.7
Setpoint value
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring can manage up to four setpoint values.
However, in general only one fixed value is used.
Please select SETUP 1, F3, F2.
The setpoint value can be increased using F1 and F2 and
decreased using F4 and F5.
Press the F3 key if the setpoint value entered should be
interpreted as a 100% value.
Press Enter to store the settings.
70
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Note
If the transformer mounting ratio (Knu) of the voltage
transformer is specified in a procedure carried out later,
then the primary voltage appears in kV in the second
row of the setpoint menu.
5.8
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz
There are two limits for setting the regulative deviation.
One limit is determined from the acceptable voltage tolerance
specified by the consumer, the other is defined by the tapchange increment of the transformer.
The minimum voltage range can be calculated using the
following equation:
Xwz[%] ≥ 0.6 · tap-change increment[%]
Xwz: Permissible regulative deviation
If a regulative deviation Xwz that is smaller than the tap-change
increment of the transformer is selected, the controlled system
can never reach a stable condition; the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring will continue to increment in
steps.
Please select SETUP 1, F1.
The permissible regulative deviation can be increased using F1
and F2 and decreased using F4 and F5.
The parameter is confirmed by pressing Enter.
REG-DA operating manual
71
REG-DA
5.9
Time behaviour
The golden rule for multiple feeding points is: a calm network
As a consequence, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring should be set up in such a manner that as few
switching operations as possible are carried out.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be
calmed by increasing either the permissible regulative deviation
(Xwz) or the time factor.
However, this course of action has its limits when the interests
of the recipients are violated in an impermissible manner
(voltage deviations are too large or last too long).
The standard defined reaction time tB must be changed when
using the time factor option to influence the number of
regulation events.
The default algorithm dU · t = const. ensures that small regulative
deviations may be present for a long time, before a tap-change
is triggered, whereas large deviations are rectified more quickly.
The time factor has been included as an option to influence the
reaction time tB of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring. The time factor is set to 1 as factory default. The
time tB is multiplied with the time factor and the result is the
reaction time tv of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring.
tv = tB · time factor
The value of the time factor must be multiplied with the reaction
time taken from the diagram.
72
REG-DA operating manual
Reaction time tB [sec] for time factor: 1
REG-DA
25
Set permissible
regulative deviation
20
15
10
5
0
0
1
2
3
4
Present regulative deviation UW [%]
5
6
7
8
9
10
Example:
Present regulative deviation
Xw = 4%;
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz = 2%
tv = tB · time factor
(range of the time factor: 0,1 ... 30
see SETUP 1, F2, F3)
→ with time factor: 1: 15 sec;
→ with time factor: 2: 30 sec;
Note
In practice, a time factor between 2 and 3 is used.
However, a general recommendation cannot be given,
since the correct time factor is dependent on both the
network and the customer configuration.
Please select SETUP 1, F2, F3 and enter the time factor using
F1, F2 and F4, F5.
REG-DA operating manual
73
REG-DA
Confirm your choice by pressing Enter.
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring offers several time programs.
In addition to the default-selected dU · t = const. integral
method, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring offers a fast integral method, a linear method and a
further method working with a fixed times that can be found
under the name CONST.
If CONST is selected, all regulative deviations that lie outside the
tolerance band and that are smaller than the selected
permissible deviation are rectified within time T1. For larger
regulative deviations, however, the time will be T2.
Example:
The selected permissible regulative deviation is ±1%.
Reaction time T1 is valid in the range from 1% to 2%. The Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring carries out tapchanges according to the time selected for T2 if the regulative
deviation is larger than 2% (calculated from the setpoint value!).
For further information see Page 255.
74
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
5.10
Backward high-speed switching
While the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
operating according to the algorithm dU · t = const., events will
always be regulated such that the next tap-change will be
triggered after a short time for large deviations and after a long
time for small deviations.
Example:
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz:
1%
Present regulative deviation Xw:
+6%
Time factor:
1
Tap-change increment of the transformer:
1,5%
Reaction time tB [sec] for time factor: 1
The curve below gives a time of 42 s, the time within which the
fault will be rectified.
High-speed switching can be used to reduce this time.
If, in the above example, the high-speed switching limit were set
to 6%, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
would switch the voltage back to the permissible range of the
voltage tolerance band as soon as this limit is reached and the
selected time delay for high-speed mode has passed.
25
20
Set permissible
regulative deviation
Tap-change 4
15
10
Tap-change 3
Tap-change 2
5
0
Tap-change 1
0
1
2
3
4
Present regulative deviation UW [%]
REG-DA operating manual
5
6
7
8
9
10
75
REG-DA
Diagram:
Present regulative deviation
Xw = 6%;
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz = 1%
tv = tB · time factor
→ with time factor: 1:
1st tap-change after 5 s
2nd tap-change after 7 s
3rd tap-change after 10 s
4th tap-change after 20 s
________________________
Total time =
42 s
Please select SETUP 3, F4 and select backward high-speed
switching using F3. Then enter the desired limit as a % of the
setpoint value.
Confirm your choice by pressing Enter.
The time delay can be set in SETUP 4, F4 after backward highspeed switching has been activated.
Confirm your choice by pressing Enter.
76
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
5.11
Tap-changer running time
If the high-speed switching limit is reached, then the running
time of the tap-changer determines the time required for the
voltage to return to being within the tolerance band.
If the running time of the tap-changer is specified, other control
signals can be prevented from being output when the tapchanger is running.
Old tap-changing devices in particular may occasionally
respond with an EMERGENCY STOP signal, if a further control
signal is input at the same moment that the tap-changer is
changing to a new position.
The running time of the tap-changer can be entered in menu
Add-On 1.
Please select SETUP 5, F1
If the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
operating in high-speed switching mode, two seconds will be
added to the entered running time. The Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring will not issue a new control
command until this entire running time has elapsed.
Note
This function will be carried out by the (PAN-D) voltage
monitoring unit if the unit is present in the regulating
system.
Extension:
Two further settings in SETUP 5 enable the running time of the
tap-changer to be monitored.
The tap-change in operation lamp (TC) signal can be connected
to one of the freely programmable inputs (E3 in this case).
(SETUP 5, F3).
REG-DA operating manual
77
REG-DA
A freely programmable relay (in this case relay 5) can be used
for fault reporting (TC-Err).
TC-Err+
→ transmits a wiping signal in the event of a fault
TC-Err.
→ transmits a continuous signal in the event of a
fault
This signal can be used to stop the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring or turn off the motor drive.
78
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
5.12
Knx transformer mounting ratios and
transformer connection
This point can be skipped if only the secondary transformer
voltage is required for regulation and the transducer functions
of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring are
not required.
In all other cases, the transformer mounting ratios and the
“sources” of both the current and the voltage must be named.
If it is specified via the REG-DA menu that the current
transformer is connected to external connector L3 and that the
voltage to be measured is between L1 and L2, the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring corrects the 90°
angle by itself and delivers the correct values for all the outputs
and for the reactive current I · sin ϕ.
Please select SETUP 5, F2, F1
Select the source of the voltage that is to be regulated using F2
or F4 and confirm the selection by using F3 or Enter.
Õ
Õ
Knu is the quotient of the input voltage and the output voltage
of the voltage transformer and ensures that the primary voltage
is displayed (e.g. 20 kV and not 100V).
Select the transformer mounting ratio Knu using F2 or F4 and
confirm the selection with the ENTER key.
REG-DA operating manual
79
REG-DA
Select SETUP 5, F2 + F2
Example:
Primary voltage:
20 kV
Secondary voltage:
100 V
Knu = 20 kV / 0.1 kV
Knu = 200
The voltage is measured by the voltage transformer between L2
and L3, and the current transformer is connected to phase L3.
➪ Select SETUP 5, F2
➪ Select the voltage L2L3 using F1 and confirm the selection
using F3
➪ Select the transformer mounting ratio Knu using F2 and
confirm the selection with the ENTER key
➪ Select the current transformer mounting location L3 using
F3 and confirm the selection with F3
5.13
Setting the nominal current
In general it is not necessary to supply the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring with a current to perform
voltage regulation.
If, however, a current-dependent setpoint adjustment is
required or the output data should be displayed, a power
supply must be provided.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can
operate with 1 A and 5 A input signals.
80
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Please select SETUP 5, F2, F4.
Confirm the selection with the ENTER key.
Kni is the quotient of the input current and the output current of
the current transformer.
Example:
Primary current:
600 A
Secondary current:
5A
Kni = 600 A / 5 A
Kni = 120
Please select SETUP 5, F2, F5
Confirm the selection with the ENTER key.
REG-DA operating manual
81
REG-DA
5.14
Inhibit low limit
Scenario:
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
operates with a 110 kV / 20 kV transformer.
Problems on the high voltage side cause the voltage to break
down slowly.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring rectifies
this and increases the tap-changes of the transformer, to
stabilise the voltage on the secondary side at 20 kV.
As soon as a fault on the primary side is eliminated, the primary
voltage jumps back to the original voltage value.
However, since tap changes in the direction of a higher voltage
were carried out as a result of the voltage breakdown (amongst
other things), the secondary voltage is so high that problems on
the secondary side can no longer be precluded (protective relay
triggered, etc.).
Requirement:
If the voltage that is to be regulated falls beneath a particular
limit due to a fault on the primary or secondary side, the Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring shouldn’t
undertake further attempts to raise the voltage.
This requirement can only be achieved using the inhibit low
limit.
Please select SETUP 3, F5.
F1, F2 and F4, F5 can be used to enter a percentage value
beneath which the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring does not try to rectify a voltage breakdown.
As soon as the voltage increases above the entered value
82
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
again, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
automatically restarts the regulation by itself.
In order to prevent short-term voltage breakdowns triggering
the inhibit low of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring, a time delay after which the inhibit low will be
activated can be entered in SETUP 4, F5 using F1, F2, F4 or F5.
Please select SETUP 4, F5.
Example:
Setpoint value 100 V
If a voltage of < 90 V occurs for a period longer than 10
seconds, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring should change to inhibit low.
Input of inhibit low limit:
SETUP 3, F5
Input:
-10%
Time delay input:
SETUP 4, F5
10 seconds
REG-DA operating manual
Input:
83
REG-DA
5.15
Trigger
The trigger limit describes the entered voltage as an absolute
value, above which the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring suppresses all control commands.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
automatically starts regulation by itself if the voltage falls
beneath this value (see also Page 242).
Please select SETUP 3, F3
Select the trigger value using the F1, F2 and F4, F5 keys and
confirm the selection using the ENTER key.
Please select SETUP 4, F3
Choose the time delay for the triggering using the F1, F2 and
F4, F5 keys and confirm the selection using the ENTER key.
The limit signals can also be connected to the relay outputs /
binary outputs (“see "Relay assignments" on page 143).
In addition, the “Trigger” signal can also be indicated by the
programmable LEDs (see "LED assignments" on page 145).
84
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
5.16
Short description of individual limit values,
setpoint values and permissible regulative
deviation.
G1
Tripping
G2
Backward highspeed switching
G4
>U
setpoint
value
Permissible
regulative deviation
G6
G3
<U
Forward highspeed switching
Undervoltage
inhibit low
G8
Tap-changes
Raise
Lower
5.16.1
Description of the individual settings
Setpoint value:
The value that the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring should regulate the voltage to.
The setpoint value can be displayed in primary or secondary
values.
Secondary values: e.g. 100V or 110V
Primary values: e.g. 11 kV, 20 kV, 33 kV, 110 kV
The primary values can be displayed by parameterising the
transformer mounting ratio Knu (0.01 ... 4000)
Setting range of the voltage setpoint values: 60 ... 140 V
Further information: see "Setpoints" on page 111
REG-DA operating manual
85
REG-DA
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz:
Since the transformer mounting ratio of a tap-change
transformer cannot be continuously changed, there must be a
voltage range surrounding the setpoint that the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring cannot affect.
This range is designated as the permissible tolerance band or
the permissible regulative deviation.
The lower limit of the tolerance band depends on the tapchanging increments of the transformer.
If the tolerance band is set so that it is smaller than the tapchanging increment, the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring “hunts” the setpoint value and
repeatedly steps away from the tolerance band in both positive
and negative directions.
If, on the other hand, the entered tolerance band is too large, it
could lead to complaints from consumers because the voltage
fluctuates over a large range.
Setting range: 0,1 ... 10%
The entered percent value always refers to the selected
setpoint value.
Further information: see "Permissible regulative deviation" on
page 109.
Trigger (G1):
“Triggering” describes an upper absolute voltage limit, which
causes the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
to stop carrying out tap-changes.
The limit is described on the display in plain text and if required
it can also activate a relay that either triggers a protective device
or simply delivers the information to the control panel.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
operates in the normal manner if the voltage is below the limit.
The setting range of the trigger is 100 ... 150 V (can only be
entered as a secondary value!).
The voltage is to understood as the output voltage of the
voltage transformer on the secondary side of the transformer
and can only be entered as an absolute value.
86
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Reason: If the “trigger” limit were based on the setpoint value
(for example) and several setpoint values were used, the trigger
limit would “wander” with the setpoint.
If, however, there is a fixed limit for the voltage above which the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is stopped
and a protective element is triggered, it is an absolute value
rather than a relative value.
Further information: see "Trigger inhibit high (highest limit value
of the voltage)" on page 119.
Backward high-speed switching (G2):
If the voltage leaves the tolerance band, a particular time
program is activated. The time program defines the amount of
time that must elapse before the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring outputs the first (and possibly further)
control commands.
All time programs are based on the assumption that large
voltage deviations are rectified quickly and small deviations are
rectified slowly.
The backward high-speed switching limit defines the voltage
above which the time program is ignored and the transformer
is regulated back to the voltage band in high-speed time by the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. The
voltage band is defined by the “permissible regulative deviation”
parameter.
The high-speed time is defined by the running time of the
transformer per switching process.
If a tap-change in operation lamp is connected, the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring waits until the lamp
has turned off before the next tap-change occurs. If there is no
tap-change in operation lamp connected, the switching
frequency is determined by the maximum time TC in operation
parameter (SETUP 5, F1, F2).
Setting range: 0 ... +35% *
Further information: see "High-speed switching when
overvoltage occurs (LOWER)" on page 120.
REG-DA operating manual
87
REG-DA
Forward high-speed switching (G3):
If the voltage leaves the tolerance band, a particular time
program is activated. The time program defines the amount of
time that must elapse before the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring outputs the first (and possibly further)
control commands.
All time programs are based on the assumption that large
voltage deviations are rectified quickly and small deviations are
rectified slowly.
The forward high-speed switching limit defines the voltage
above which the time program is ignored and the transformer
is regulated back to the voltage band in high-speed time by the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. The
voltage band is defined by the “permissible regulative deviation”
parameter.
The high-speed time is defined by the running time of the
transformer per switching process.
If a tap-change in operation lamp is connected, the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring waits until the lamp
has turned off before the next tap-change occurs. If there is no
tap-change in operation lamp connected, the switching
frequency is determined by the maximum time TC in operation
parameter (SETUP 5, F1, F2).
Setting range: -35% ... 0% *
Further information: see "High-speed switching when
undervoltage occurs (RAISE)" on page 120.
Overvoltage >U (G4):
The overvoltage >U is a limit value that only influences the
regulation in special operating circumstances, and that can be
parameterised if required using an LED or an output relay.
If the voltage exceeds the >U limit then all “raise” commands
are surpressed.
The limit value particularly influences the regulation if operating
with several setpoints and using an absolute value (100 V / 110
V) as the limit value for >U.
Setting range: 0 ... +25% *
88
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Further information: see "> U Overvoltage" on page 118.
Undervoltage <U (G6):
The undervoltage <U is a limit value that only influences the
regulation in special operating circumstances, and that can be
parameterised if required using an LED or an output relay.
If the voltage falls below the <U limit, all “lower” commands are
surpressed.
The limit value particularly influences the regulation if operating
with several setpoints and using an absolute value (100 V / 110
V) as the limit value for <U.
Setting range: -25% ... 0% *
Further information: see "< U Undervoltage" on page 117.
Inhibit low (G8):
If the voltage falls below the undervoltage inhibit low limit, the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring switches to
a standstill.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
operates in the normal manner as long as the voltage is above
the limit.
Setting range: -75% ... 0% *
Further information: see "REG-DA inhibit low when
undervoltage occurs" on page 121.
* The percent values relate to the appropriate setpoint value,
100 V or 110 V.
Select the reference value in SETUP 5, Add-On 5, F2.
REG-DA operating manual
89
REG-DA
90
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
6
Basic Settings
The following are considered to be basic settings of the Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring: Time, password,
interfaces (COM1, COM2, E-LAN), LCD contrast, etc.
All of the basic settings can be defined and modified in “SETUP”
menu 6.
6.1
General
6.1.1
Station ID
A to Z4
Note
Relays for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
which are operated on a bus (E-LAN) must have
different addresses (A ... Z4).
REG-DA operating manual
91
REG-DA
6.1.2
Station name
Note
The Relay name is best entered using WinREG.
However, it can also be entered using the Relay keypad
and the following procedure.
Õ
Õ
`
92
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Newly entered
station name
Õ
6.1.3
Setting the time/date
Note
The change from summer time to winter time and from
winter time to summer time is controlled by a
background program.
Relays for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
that are likely to be used outside Europe do not change
automatically.
The change is controlled by program line H31.
However, if the change is required, Hn=" SOWI, IF,
ZEIT-, +, ZEIT=." must be added to the H program lines.
How to proceed:
Connect the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring to the PC, start WinREG, open the terminal,
enter <HLIST>and fill any line of the background
program with the line of text listed above.
Press Enter to complete the process.
REG-DA operating manual
93
REG-DA
6.1.4
LCD contrast (display)
The contrast setting can be used to ensure that the Relay
display can be read easily from various viewing angles.
6.1.5
Password
The password prevents changes to individual settings.
Measurement values and parameters can, however, be “read”
without restrictions.
If the password is used, the locking only comes into effect
approximately 4 minutes after it is applied.
Note
User 1 may change all passwords at will, whereas all of
the other users can only change their own personal
password.
94
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Deleting Passwords
Enter “111111”.
It is only possible to delete a password if user 1 has “opened”
the device with his/her password!
Note
This procedure switches off the entire password
request (including that of other users!).
The passwords of users 2 to 5 (only) are deleted.
Password request
Wrong Password
Correct
Password
Insert
6.1.6
Deleting recorder data
(resetting the measured value memory)
after confirming
with the key
the memory
of the recorder
will be deleted.
i h “R
REG-DA operating manual
”
95
REG-DA
6.1.7
Deleting tap-change sums
(resetting the tap-counter to zero)
after confirming
with the key
the total number
of tap-changes
Reset to zero
i h “R
6.1.8
”
Actual value correction of the measuring voltage UE
The actual value correction of the voltage is designed to
compensate for voltage drops on the line and to correct
measurement transformer errors.
6.1.9
Actual value correction of the measuring current IE
The actual value correction of the current primarily corrects
errors in the measurement transformer.
96
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Note
If the parameters are read out and archived via WinREG,
the values of the actual value corrections will be missing,
because they can only be assigned to a certain device
and are not transferable to other devices!
6.2
RS-232 interfaces
6.2.1
COM 1
The COM 1 interface can be used as a parameterisation /
programming interface via a SUB-D plug on the front of the
device.
The standard setting is “ECL”.
This mode enables WinREG to access the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring. Furthermore, time
synchronisation can be carried out via DCF77 (with “DCF77”
setting and connection of a suitable antenna).
A profibus module can be addressed in “PROFI” mode and
information from the E-LAN system bus is directed to COM 1
using the LAN-L or LAN-R setting.
REG-DA operating manual
97
REG-DA
For more information, please also refer to COM 2 from Page 99
onwards.
Õ
Õ
98
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
6.2.2
COM 2
COM 2 is also suitable for the control system connection of a
REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring.
If the REG-DA is connected to other devices (RED-D, REG-DP,
REG-DPA, EOR-D, PQI-D, CPR-D, etc.) via E-LAN, it is
possible to communicate with several devices via a single
interface.
This possibility is not available for all profiles, therefore we
advise you to contact our company headquarters.
If the COM 2 interface is used for permanent connections to
higher-level systems, the COM 1 interface remains available for
connecting a PC, printer or modem.
An (integrated) protocol card (see feature list XW90, XW91 or
L1, L9) is also required for communication with a control
system.
The data exchange between the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring and the protocol interface is carried out
via the COM 2 interface.
The integrated protocol card converts the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring information to the standardcompliant language according to IEC 61870-5-101, -103, 104, IEC 61850, MODBUS, SPABUS, PROFI.BUS, DNP 3.0,
LON. Similarly, it translates the information from the control
system into a “dialect” that the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring can understand.
Õ
Õ
REG-DA operating manual
99
REG-DA
The standard mode is the “MODE ECL”. The selection of the
DCF77 setting and the connection of a suitable aerial should
only be carried out if the time is to be synchronised via DCF77.
If the information of the E-LANs (LAN-L, LAN-R) is to be routed
to the serial interface, for example to achieve modem
transmissions on the “E-LAN level”, the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring must be set to LAN-L or
LAN-R. A more detailed description has been omitted here
since these types of connections should always be carried out
with the support of our company.
“PROFI” is always the right setting for the COM, if a PROFIBUSDP connection should be implemented.
In this case, an external PROFIBUS-DP module is controlled via
COM 1 or COM 2.
The setting ECL+HP enables output which is generated via a
background program to also be output via COM 2.
Example:
Based on the regulated voltage or the tap-changer position, a
specific text is to be output via COM 2. In this case, ECL+HP is
to be selected, since all output which is generated via a
background program is normally output via COM 1.
100
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
6.3
E-LAN (Energy-Local Area Network)
For background information on the “E-LAN”, please see Page
267 and 32.
Every Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring has
two complete E-LAN interfaces.
E-LAN LEFT defines the settings for bus left
(Connection level III, Terminals 69, 70, 71 and 72 see Page 42).
E-LAN RIGHT defines the settings for bus right
(Connection level III, Terminals 73, 74, 75 and 76 see Page 42).
Each one of these E-LAN interfaces also functions with either a
2-wire line or 4-wire transmission technology (RS485).
Circuit board - level III
BUS-L
BUS-R
Function 2-wire
Terminal Terminal
4-wire
72
76
EA+
Input and
output “+”
Output “+”
71
75
EA-
Input and
output “-”
Output “-”
70
74
E+
No function
Input “+”
69
73
E-
No function
Input “-”
A 2-wire line is normally used, because this is the only system
that allows one bus configuration with several stations on the
same bus line. To do so, the integrated terminating resistor of
the first and the last stations on the bus line must be switched
on. (Selection: „terminated”)
REG-DA operating manual
101
REG-DA
If the terminating resistances are not installed (terminated)
properly, reflections may occur at the ends of the lines which
make it impossible to transfer the data securely.
4-wire transmission technology must be used for long
transmission distances or if boosters (amplifiers for increasing
the signal level over very long transmission distances must be
used). The required terminating resistances will be
automatically activated (the selection “terminated” is no
longer required).
Õ
Õ
102
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
If the terminating resistors are installed properly (only possible
in 2-wire operation), the baud rates are set properly and the
wirings are carried out in the correct way, a cross “
” should
appear in the square brackets of the two devices that are
connected together.
The cross “
” indicates that the corresponding neighbouring
station has been detected.
If the connection is not successful, the devices react with a
flashing cross “
”.
This might be caused by:
1.
Wiring fault, open or wrong wiring
2.
Identical station codes (each Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring must be assigned a unique
address)
3.
The baud rates of the Relays for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring that are connected to each other
are not the same
Example:
The E-LAN right bus terminal of Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring <A> is connected with the E-LAN left
bus terminal of Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring <B>.
The baud rate of the E-LAN right of Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring <A> must have the same baud rate as
the E-LAN left of Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring <B>.
REG-DA operating manual
103
REG-DA
4.
Wrong termination
Only the first and the last device of a bus segment may be
terminated (please also refer to Page 267).
Termination is not required for a four-wire connection.
The first and last terminals only have to be terminated in a twowire bus connection.
6.4
PAN-D voltage monitoring unit
Parameterisation of
PAN - D
(refer to
PAN - D operating manual)
The PAN-D monitoring unit is not equipped for entering the
parameters via the screen and keypad.
If a PAN-D monitoring unit is used in connection with a REG-DA
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring connected
via E-LAN, the monitoring unit “borrows” the keypad and the
screen from the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring for parameterising and displaying values.
Use the F4 key to start this process.
6.5
Status
(current ID data of the REG-DA Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring)
The menu item “Status” lists all of the information which is
important for the system identification.
The current input status of both input circuits is displayed as a
hexadecimal number in the REG-DA status (1) in addition to the
firmware version and the battery status, etc..
This information is particularly useful for commissioning. The
hexadecimal numbers should be interpreted as follows:
104
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Inputs
Inputs
Inputs
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Signal
x
−
x
Signal
−
Significance
8
4
2
= HEX A
8
1
x
x
x
4
2
= HEX F
6
5
4
Signal
x
Significance
8
7
Inputs
1
−
x
x
4
2
= HEX 7
2
1
Signal
x
Significance
8
3
1
x
x
−
x
Significance
8
4
2
1
= HEX D
x = ON
− = OFF
The input status shown above would be displayed in the status
as HEX AF7D.
During the initial commissioning of the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring, this enables clarification as to
whether or not a signal has been sent to the terminals.
Pressing the right arrow key
opens a display menu in
which the active additional features are listed.
In this example the ParaGramer and the four setpoint values are
shown.
REG-DA operating manual
105
REG-DA
Pressing the right arrow key again
COM 2 settings.
shows the COM 1 and
A further press of the right arrow key
explains the
settings of the E-LAN R and E-LAN L bus interfaces and
provides information about the total number of stations that are
registered in the network.
Pressing the right arrow key
again opens a menu in
which COM 3 and the stations that are detected there (ANA-D,
BIN-D) are listed.
COM 3 is not connected in the example.
106
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Pressing the right arrow key
again displays the log book.
All important events are stored in the log together with the
respective time and date. Up to 127 events can be stored in
total. The LOG BOOK memory is a First In First Out (FIFO)
rotating memory, i.e. if the memory is full, the oldest entry (event
1) will be replaced with the newest (127th) event.
Use the keys F2 ... F5 to search for a particular entry.
The following events are saved with a time and date:
Power ON
Manual
Automatic
Local
Remote
<U
<U
>I
Forward high-speed switching
Backward high-speed switching
Trigger
Inhibit Low
REG-DA operating manual
107
REG-DA
7
Parameterisation of the REG-DA Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring
The most important steps for the parameterising are also
described in „Commissioning” on page 63.
➪ The “LOCAL” and “MANUAL”
operating modes must
be set in order to enter parameters.
Note
Changes in the parameters are only accepted in the
“MANUAL OPERATING MODE”
.
When the password request is activated, a valid
password must be entered (for information on the
password request refer to “password request” on see
"Password request" on page 95).
Operating principle please refer to Page 51.
108
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.1
Permissible regulative deviation
For background information on the “permissible regulative
deviation”
please refer to Page 238.
7.2
Time behaviour (regulation behaviour)
7.2.1
Time factor
For background information on the “Time Factor”,
please refer to Page 266.
REG-DA operating manual
109
REG-DA
7.2.2
Time program
For background information on the time program, see Page
255.
Õ
Õ
7.2.3
Trend memory
For background information, see “Trend memory” see "Trend
memory" on page 260.
Õ
Õ
110
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.3
Setpoints
For background information on the “setpoint value” (command
variable)
please refer to Page 227.
Display of the setpoint value
If the primary value (the single-underlined value (here: 15 kV))
should be displayed rather than the secondary value, the
transformer mounting ratio Knu must be entered in the menu
„Transformer configuration” on page 138.
7.3.1
1st setpoint value
The U-LL voltage always corresponds to the phase-to-phase
voltage (delta voltage).
Example:
The setpoint should be 100.2 V. This value should be
simultaneously declared as the 100% value.
How to proceed:
Using the keys F1, F2, F3 and F4
set the double-underlined value to
100.2 V.
Use the F3 key to set the 100.2 V
value
as the 100% value
and confirm the value by pressing
“RETURN”
REG-DA operating manual
.
111
REG-DA
7.3.2
Further setpoint values
Proceed in the same way for the 3rd and 4th setpoint values.
When switching from one setpoint value to another via a binary
input, background program or control system, tap-changing
commands will also be output at the same time until the voltage
lies within the tolerance band around the new setpoint value.
The time interval between two successive tap-changes is
determined by the maximum time TC in operation (SETUP 5,
Add-On 1).
If the regulation is carried out using the PAN-D monitoring unit,
the maximum time TC in operation must always be set directly
on the PAN-D when both units (REG-DA, PAN-D) are
connected via E-LAN.
Note
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring can regulate outputs (P or Q) as well as
voltages. This situation will always occur if a phase-shift
transformer is used.
For this reason the PQCTRL feature must be loaded.
Setpoint 3 will then become a P setpoint, and setpoint
4 will become a Q setpoint.
The individual setpoints can be selected via the binary
inputs, via the COM 1 and COM 2 interfaces or via one
of the available protocols (IEC ...., DNP, MODBUS,
SPABUS, etc).
112
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.4
Programs
(parameters for parallel regulation of
transformers and for the compensation of
the voltage drop on the line)
7.4.1
Selection of the parallel programs (regulation
programs)
For background information on “Parallel Programs”, please see
Page 271.
Õ
Õ
REG-DA operating manual
113
REG-DA
7.4.2
Parameters for the parallel program
Different parameter menus are available depending on the
selected parallel program.
The following menu appears for the ∆I · sinϕ (circulating current
minimisation) program.
Control influence (Icirc monitoring)
For further information about setting the permissible circulating
reactive current,
please refer to Page 275.
Limitation
The “Limitation” menu item only appears when the ∆cosϕ
program is selected.
114
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Net cos ϕ
The Network cosϕ menu item only appears when the ∆cosϕ
program is selected.
Nominal power of the transformer
The “nominal power of the transformer” menu item only
appears when the ∆Isinϕ(S) program is selected.
Group list (of parallel-switched transformers)
The group list must be entered for all programs, except the
∆cosϕ procedure.
Relays with the same prefixes before the identification (address)
are operating in parallel on one busbar.
In this example, transformers A, B and C are feeding on the
same busbar.
REG-DA operating manual
115
REG-DA
7.4.3
Current influence (line-drop compensation)
For background information, please see "Determining the
voltage levels XR and Uf" on page 231.
The gradient and the limitation for the current influences,
apparent current, active current and reactive current, are
entered in Setup 1 (F1 and F2).
The parameters for the line drop compensation (LDC) are
described in „LDC parameter (line drop compensation)” on
page 116.
Õ
Õ
7.4.4
LDC parameter (line drop compensation)
For background information, please see "Measuring the voltage
drop as a function of the current strength and cos j" on page
229.
116
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.5
Gradient (U/I characteristic)
For background information on the “Gradient”,
please refer to Page 232.
7.6
Limitation (U/I characteristic)
For background information on the “Limitation”,
please refer to Page 232.
7.7
< U Undervoltage
For background information on “< U Undervoltage”,
please refer to Page 244.
REG-DA operating manual
117
REG-DA
7.8
> U Overvoltage
For background information on “> U Overvoltage”,
please refer to Page 243.
7.9
> I, < Limit (upper and lower current limits)
For background information on “> I, < I limit value”,
please refer to Page 244.
118
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.10
Trigger
inhibit high (highest limit value of the
voltage)
For background information on “Trigger”,
please refer to Page 242.
Please note that the trigger must be entered as an absolute
value.
Reason: The respective setpoint is normally used as a reference
for setting the limit value.
However, if multiple setpoints are used, the trigger limit
“wanders” between the selected setpoints.
In general there is only one voltage − independent of the
selected setpoint − which triggers a transformer or outputs a
message, thus it is always better to enter the trigger limit in V.
REG-DA operating manual
119
REG-DA
7.11
High-speed switching during undervoltage/
overvoltage
7.11.1
High-speed switching when undervoltage occurs
(RAISE)
For background information about high-speed forward
switching,
please refer to Page 243.
7.11.2
High-speed switching when overvoltage occurs
(LOWER)
For background information about high-speed backwards
switching,
please refer to Page 242.
120
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.12
REG-DA inhibit low when undervoltage
occurs
For background information on “Inhibit Low”,
please refer to Page 245.
7.13
Time delays (limit signals)
Note
Each parameter or limit value can function with an
individual switching delay!
7.13.1
Time delay > U
For background information on the “switching delay”,
please refer to Page 241.
REG-DA operating manual
121
REG-DA
7.13.2
Time delay < U
For background information on the “switching delay”,
please refer to Page 241.
7.13.3
Time delay > I, < I limit value
For background information on the time delay, please see Page
241.
7.13.4
Time delay trigger
For background information on the “switching delay”,
please refer to Page 241.
122
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.13.5
Time delay forward high-speed switching
For background information on the time delay, please see Page
241.
7.13.6
Time delay backward high-speed switching
For background information on the time delay, please see Page
241.
REG-DA operating manual
123
REG-DA
7.13.7
Time delay inhibit low
For background information on the “switching delay”,
please refer to Page 241.
7.14
Add-Ons (Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring behaviour)
The various parameterisations are summarised under the “AddOns” menu item.
This menu item contains parameters that cannot be assigned
to other parameter groups. Furthermore, it contains some
parameters that could be assigned to particular parameter
groups, but which were not included where one might expect
to find them out of consideration of the existing SETUP
structure.
Therefore “Add-Ons” is a collection of parameters and special
functions that are often used for special customer
requirements.
In any cases, we recommend having an overview of the
individual screens.
7.14.1
Overview of the Add-Ons menus numbers 1 to 6
“Add-Ons” contains six sub-menus (Add-On 1 to Add-On 6)
that can be selected using the F1 key.
124
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
REG-DA operating manual
125
REG-DA
All the menu points are described sequentially below.
The description beings with Add-On 1 and ends with Add-On 6.
7.14.2
Maximum time TC in operation (motor-drive-in
operation-time)
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be
used to monitor the running time of the motor drive (tapchanger). If the set maximum time has run out, a signal will be
triggered. This signal can be used to switch off the motor drive.
This protects the tap-changer against passing through all
cycles.
If the PAN-D voltage monitoring unit is used, the maximum time
of the tap-changer in operation can only be set via the PAN-D
voltage monitoring unit (refer to the PAN-D operating manual).
To do this, first enter the maximum running time of the tapchanger per tap in “Add-On 1”. The maximum time TC in
operation signal can then be assigned to an input (refer to input
assignments (binary inputs) on see "Input assignments (binary
inputs)" on page 142). Finally, the message “tap-changer
interrupted” can be output via a relay output (refer to see "Relay
assignments" on page 143).
There are two ways to parameterise the relay:
1. “Maximum Time of Tap-Changer in Operation-F” outputs a
continuous message when the specified maximum time is
exceeded.
2. “Maximum Time of Tap-Changer in Operation-F+” outputs a
temporary message when the specified maximum time is
exceeded.
Note
Measure the running time of the tap-changer and enter
a value for the maximum time of tap-changer in
operation that is two to three seconds bigger.
126
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.14.3
Manual/Automatic
Õ
Õ
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring offers
two different options for switching between the Manual and
AUTOMATIC operating modes.
In addition to the options already described above, the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can also naturally be
switched using the serial COM interfaces or the IEC-, DNP-...
protocols.
If you wish to use a serial connection, it is always advisable to
contact our headquarters.
Flip/Flop switching behaviour
In the “E5: PULSE“ setting, a pulse at input E5 causes a
changeover from “MANUAL” to “AUTOMATIC”. A further pulse
at this input causes it to change back from “AUTOMATIC” to
“MANUAL”, i.e. each pulse changes the operating mode.
Bistable Switching Behaviour
In the “E5-A/E6-H” setting, a pulse or continuous signal to
input E5 causes a changeover from “MANUAL” to
“AUTOMATIC”. Further signals to this input do not change the
operating mode, i.e. the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring remains in the “AUTOMATIC”
operating mode.
The changeover from “AUTOMATIC” to “MANUAL” is carried
out via a pulse or a continuous signal to input E6. Further
signals to this input do not change the operating mode, i.e. the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring remains in
the “MANUAL” operating mode.
REG-DA operating manual
127
REG-DA
7.14.4
Tap-changing
Õ
Õ
OFF
“OFF” is selected if no signals are available for displaying the
tap-changer position.
Two dashes “--” appear on the display in regulator mode.
ON
If BCD-coded signals are available for displaying the tapchanger position, please select the “ON” position.
In the regulator mode, the display shows the tap-changer
position.
Note
If an error occurs (BCD signals are present and the tapchanger parameter is set to “ON”), please check the
connections and the selected “input assignment”.
If the software switch for the tap-changes is set to “ON”, yet
there is no tap-change information available, the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring displays tap-change
0. Such a display could cause operating personnel to come to
wrong conclusions.
Please also observe that the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring automatically checks the correctness
of the tap-changer position.
However, the tap-changer must be turned on.
The error message “TapErr” is displayed to indicate incorrect
tap-changer settings.
TapErr is activated if an illogical tap-change is signalled.
TapErr is only intended to be informative, since the correct
display of tap-changes is not essential for the regulation of
individual transformers.
128
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
If the TapErr signal is assigned to a relay which has set the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring to the
manual mode, regulation can be interrupted when a tap error is
detected.
Further information can be found on Page 184 and Page 295.
7.14.5
Self-conduction of the operating mode
WITH
WITH” stores the operating mode of the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring in the event that the auxiliary
voltage fails. This means that after the voltage returns, the Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will be reset to
“AUTOMATIC” if it was in “AUTOMATIC” operating mode
before the voltage failure and will be reset to “MANUAL” if it was
previously in “MANUAL” operating mode.
WITHOUT
WITHOUT” does not store the operating mode if the auxiliary
voltage fails. This means that the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring will always be in the “MANUAL”
operating mode after the voltage returns.
7.14.6
Current display (of the transformer)
REG-DA operating manual
129
REG-DA
ON
In the “ON” setting, the current can also be displayed in the
regulator display (compact display).
OFF
In order to prevent 0.000 A from being displayed for a faulty
current connection, the current display can be surpressed.
7.14.7
LCD saver (display)
On
The display turns off one hour after the keypad was last used.
However, the background illumination turns off approximately
15 minutes after the keypad was last used.
OFF
The screen always remains on; only the background
illumination turns off approximately 15 minutes after the keypad
was last used.
7.14.8
Regulator mode: large display
OFF
The option of choosing the detailed view will be offered on the
display.
130
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
ON
Compared to the detailed display, the large display only shows
the present voltage and tap-changer position.
Note
The F1 key can be used to switch between the normal
and the large display size when in regulator mode.
7.14.9
Language selection
Õ
Õ
REG-DA operating manual
131
REG-DA
7.14.10 Parallel Program Activation
Õ
Õ
The parallel program can be activated either by selecting “ON”
from the menu or via a binary signal.
Selecting “LEVEL” ensures that the parallel program remains
activated as long as the signal level is sent to the selected input.
„PULSE” switches the activation ON and OFF.
The type of parallel program activation described in this section
is the simplest type of activation. However, this can often not
meet the requirements of actual use. For this reason, we
request that you primarily refer to the information in Chapter 9.
7.14.11 Up/down relay on time
Õ
Õ
If the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
outputs a tap-changing signal, the standard switch-on time of
the tap-changing pulse is 2s.
Older motor drives in particular often need a longer switch-on
time in order to accept the signal.
This menu item can be used to set the switch-on time for higher
and lower pulses from 0.5 s to 6 s in increments of 0.1 s.
132
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.14.12 AUTO(MATIC) LOCK in the event of an E-LAN error
If an E-LAN error is detected by the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring when, for example, running in parallel
with multiple transformers, the respective Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring changes from “AUTOMATIC”
to “MANUAL”. However, the automatic changeover only takes
place when the “AUTO lock when E-LAN fault occurs”
is active.
Furthermore the “AUTO lock if E-LAN fault occurs”
function ensures that it is only possible to change back to
“AUTOMATIC” when the fault has been rectified or when the
“AUTO lock if E-LAN fault occurs” is switched from ON to OFF.
7.14.13 Setpoint adjustment
Õ
Õ
The setpoint value is normally entered via the menu.
If the setpoint value has to be changed for operational reasons,
it is possible to increase or decrease it using the left
(lower) or right
(raise) arrow keys, without having to use
the more lengthy corresponding SETUP method.
The percent values set in menu Add-On 3 determine the size of
the increment/decrement of the setpoint value.
REG-DA operating manual
133
REG-DA
Example:
If 0.5% is set, the setpoint value will be increased or decreased
by 0.5% each time one of the arrow keys is pressed.
7.14.14 Creeping net breakdown
For background information on “Creeping Net Breakdown”,
please see Page 248.
Recognition
Lock Time
134
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Time Slice
Number of Changes
7.14.15 Limit base (reference value)
For background information on the “limit base”, please see
Page 245.
Õ
Õ
REG-DA operating manual
135
REG-DA
7.14.16 Setting the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring to inhibit low if <I or >I
For background information on “setting inhibit low when <I or
>I”, please refer to overcurrent on Page 245.
Õ
Õ
7.14.17 Maximum tap difference (monitoring)
A maximum tap-change difference may be set for the ∆Isinϕ
and ∆Isinϕ(S) parallel programs.
An alarm can be output during parallel switching if the
difference between the transformer tap-change levels exceeds
the entered maximum value. The parallel-operating group will
change to MANUAL.
Please connect the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring so that an optical display of the situation is possible
if too large a tap difference occurs.
For this purpose you can either assign the “ParErr” function to
one of the freely-programmable LEDs or activate a plain text
message on the Relay screen.
A background program is required for the plain text solution
which can be found in our Toolbox or which can be ordered
from our headquarters at any time.
The LED can be set up via SETUP 5, F5.
Please select the parameter 30: ParErr.
136
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.14.18 ParaGramer activation
The ParaGramer activation is described in detail in chapter 9.
If a system consisting of multiple transformers/Relays should be
able to identify by itself which transformers are operating in
parallel with which others, the ParaGramer must be switched
on and the maximum number of transformers operating in
parallel must be entered (ON-1 to ON-6).
REG-DA operating manual
137
REG-DA
7.15
Transformer configuration
The external-conductor voltage and the current to be used for
the measurement can be specified in this menu.
Furthermore, the transformer mounting ratio of the external
voltage transformer and current transformer and the nominal
value of the current can also be chosen.
Since the connection point of a Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring can generally be considered to be
equally loaded, all power values of the network can be
calculated using just one voltage and one current value.
Prerequisite: information specifying the external conductors
between which the voltage is measured and in which conductor
the current is measured is provided to the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring.
7.15.1
Transformer mounting voltage (measurement voltage)
It is not necessary to assign the voltage and current
connections to a certain position in the network (for example,
U12 and L3, etc.) in order to be able to use the REG-DA Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. The Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will always measure
the correct angle relationship regardless of between which
external conductors the voltage is measured, and regardless of
the line in which the current is measured, so long as the actual
connection is transmitted to SETUP 5, transformer mounting.
If the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
connected to an asymmetrically loaded network and correct
measurement values are still needed for both the active and the
reactive power, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring may also be operated in the Aron circuit (feature
M2).
138
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
In order to do so, both the parameterisation (transformer
mounting, voltage and current set to “ARON”) and the
connection must be carried out in the correct manner.
Please observe the following connection diagram.
The following is valid for the Aron circuit:
(A), (R), L1
(B), (S), L2
(C), (T), L3
U
V
W
u
v
w
2
5 8
Level I
REG-DA
1
3
7
9
1
3
7
9
or:
(A), (R), L1
(B), (S), L2
(C), (T), L3
U
V
W
u
v
w
2
5 8
Level I
REG-DA
Note
Even in the Aron circuit, the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring only regulates the voltage
connected between the terminals 2 and 5.
Õ
Õ
REG-DA operating manual
139
REG-DA
7.15.2
Transformer mounting ratio for the voltage
The transformer mounting ratio (Knu) of the voltage transformer
must be entered if the primary voltage value is to be displayed.
Example: 20 KV/100 V ➔ Knu = 200
Please note that the scale for the input of the transformer
mounting ratio can be changed, and therefore adapted to the
requirements, by using the F3 key.
7.15.3
Transformer mounting current (conductor connection)
Õ
Õ
7.15.4
140
Transformer mounting current (conversion 1 A / 5 A)
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.15.5
Transformer mounting ratio for the current
The transformer mounting ratio (Kni) of the current transformer
must be entered if the primary current value is to be displayed.
Example: 1000 A/100 A ➔ Kni = 1000
Please note that the scale for the input of the transformer
mounting ratio can be changed, and therefore adapted to the
requirements, by using the F3 key.
REG-DA operating manual
141
REG-DA
7.16
Input assignments (binary inputs)
Õ
Õ
Note
A detailed description of the individual functions can be
found in Chapter 16 on Page 294.
A specific function can be assigned to each input channel from
the list of selection options.
Example:
If the running time of the tap-changer is to be monitored, the
“tap-change in operation lamp” must be connected to an input
(e.g. to input E1, as is the case on delivery).
Select “TC in operation” using the arrow keys and confirm by
pressing Return. The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring interprets the signal at E1 as a “tap-change in
operation” signal and compares it to the “maximum time TC in
operation” setting in Add-On 1. Also see chapter 7.17.
If the required function is missing, the input must be set to
“Prog”. The input value can then be connected according to
the respective requirements via the background program.
In this case it is worth looking through the Toolbox on our
website (www.a-eberle.de) for similar applications or simply
contact our headquarters.
142
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.17
Relay assignments
Õ
Õ
Note
A detailed description of the individual functions can be
found in Chapter 16 on Page 294.
Relays R3 ... R11 are freely programmable.
A specific function can be assigned to each output from the list
of selection options.
REG-DA operating manual
143
REG-DA
Example:
If a message is to be sent when the running time of the tapchanger is exceeded, assign the function “TC-F” or “TC-F+” to
a freely programmable relay.
If the tap-changer in operation voltage at input E1 is applied
longer than was specified in “Add-on 1”, the relay R3 will be
activated and can function as an indicator or actuator (motor
circuit breaker off).
However, if the TC in operation lamp should be linked to one or
more events, the standard functions cannot be used. A special
program is required that can normally be implemented using a
background program.
In order to do this the output must be set to “Prog”. The relay
can then be connected and activated according to the
respective requirements via the background program.
In this case it is worth looking through the Toolbox on our
website (www.a-eberle.de) for similar applications or simply
contact our headquarters.
144
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
7.18
LED assignments
Õ
Õ
Note
A detailed description of the individual functions can be
found in Chapter 16 on Page 294.
LEDs 1 ... 12 are available to be freely programmed.
A specific display function may be assigned to each LED from
the list of selection options.
If the exceeded of the running time of the tap-changer is to be
signalled on LED 1, assign the function “TC-F” to the freely
programmable LED 1.
LED 1 will be activated if the actual running time exceeds the
specified running time.
If other application-specific functions are required, the LED
must be set to “prog” and the function must be programmed
using a background program.
To create an application-specific program, use either an
example program (toolbox) from our website (www.a-eberle.de)
or contact our company headquarters.
REG-DA operating manual
145
REG-DA
8
Measurement Value Simulation
In order to avoid the simulator being switched on accidentally,
some operating steps are required to guarantee that the
simulated voltage is only applied when it is specifically desired.
The required operating steps are:
1
Start WinREG
2
Load the terminal.
3
After pressing Enter, the device will respond by giving the
respective address, e.g. <A>.
4
In step 4 you can choose between the following options:
a)
Feature simmode=1
(enter it like this using the terminal!)
starts up the simulator, which must additionally be selected
via SETUP 6, F5.
In this mode, the simulator can only operate in the
MANUAL operating mode.
Switching from MANUAL to AUTOMATIC switches off the
simulator.
b)
Feature simmode=2
(enter it like this using the terminal!)
starts up the simulator, which must additionally be selected
via SETUP 6, F5.
In this mode, the simulator can also operate in the
AUTOMATIC operating mode.
Switching from MANUAL to AUTOMATIC does not switch
off the simulator, but it does automatically change back 15
minutes after the keyboard was last used.
c)
Feature simmode=0
(enter it like this using the terminal!)
switches off the simulator.
The simulator can no longer be switched on in SETUP 6,
F5.
The simulator mode (simmode=1) is activated as factory
default, which only permits simulator operation in the MANUAL
operating mode (simmode=1).
146
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Note
If the term “Actual Value” is displayed in capital
letters as “ACTUAL VALUE”, the „MEASUREMENT
VALUE SIMULATION” is active!
The simulator for the quantities U, I, and ϕ can be activated in
the SETUP 6/STATUS menu.
Õ
Õ
Caution!
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
automatically switches back from the „MEASUREMENT
VALUE SIMULATION” to normal regulation if no key has
been pressed within a period of approx. 15 minutes!
Note
If the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring is operated together with the PAN-D voltage
monitoring unit (connected via E-LAN), it should be
observed that in simulation mode the simulated voltage
will also be fed to the PAN-D. During simulation, the
PAN-D only sees the simulated input voltage and not
the real voltage of the system.
REG-DA operating manual
147
REG-DA
8.1
Setting the simulated voltage
When the simulator is turned on (simmode=1 or simmode = 2)
, the voltage can be simulated in regulator mode, measurement
transducer mode and recorder mode using the two arrow keys
and
.
The phase angle and the current can only be simulated in
transducer mode.
➪ Select “F2”
in “MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCER
MODE”
➪ The right arrow key
raises the simulated voltage in
0.5 V increments (when Knu=1).
➪ The left arrow key
lowers the simulated voltage in
0.5 V increments (when Knu=1).
8.2
Setting the simulated current
➪ Select “F2”
in “MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCER
MODE”
➪ ”F2”
increases the simulated current incrementally.
➪ “F3”
decreases the simulated current incrementally.
8.3
Setting the simulated phase angle
➪ Select “F2”
in “MEASUREMENT TRANSDUCER
MODE”
➪ ”F4”
increases the simulated current
in increments of 1.0 °.
➪ ”F5”
increases the simulated current
in increments of 1.0 °.
148
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
8.4
Setting the simulated tap-change
The tap-change position can be simulated when the simulator
is switched on (simmode=1 or simmode = 2).
Start the simulated tap-change by pressing “F4”
.
The simulated tap-change is indicated by
“++” after the word “measurement value simulation”.
++ ➔ Tap-change simulation is turned on
Note
The tap-changer position can only be changed if the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
set to the “MANUAL OPERATING MODE”
.
➪ “Raise arrow key”
increases the simulated tapchanger position by 1 increment.
➪ “Arrow key lower”
reduces the simulated
tap-changer position by 1.
REG-DA operating manual
149
REG-DA
9
Parallel Operation of Transformers
with REG-DA
Parallel switching of several transformers must be prepared in
advance. In general, the taps of the transformers regulated in
parallel must first be adjusted to each other and the circuit
breakers and disconnectors have to be put in the
corresponding position. Then, all of the Relays switched in
parallel must be informed of these switching statuses.
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring is provided with a program section which is capable
of independently recognizing the switching statuses of the
individual transformers and can automatically group the
transformers according to these switching statuses so that only
those Relays feeding on one joint busbar work in parallel.
It is, of course, also possible to work in the standard way in
which the parallel-switching operation is manually activated.
Both procedures require specific preparations to be carried out
on the device in advance. The preparations to be carried out are
described in the following sections:
➪ Preparing manual activation
➪ Preparing automatic activation
Before selecting the regulation procedure, please check the
boundary conditions of the regulation.
Are the transformers the same or differing models? Is it
possible to connect the individual Relays with each other via
E-LAN, or is the distance between each feeding point too
large making connection impossible?
Should the transformers be regulated so that they all have
the same tap-changer position or should the circulating
reactive current be minimised?
One of the regulation procedures listed below can be chosen
depending on the answer:
150
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
All the procedures are available in the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring as standard.
Master-slave
Master-Slave-Independent (MSI)
∆I sinϕ (minimisation of the circulating reactive current)
∆I sinϕ (S) (minimisation of the circulating reactive current,
taking into consideration the nominal powers of the
transformers)
∆cosϕ
The ∆ cosϕ operation is an available regulation procedure
which is always used if the Relays which are switched in parallel
cannot be connected to each other via the bus (E-LAN).
If a bus error occurs during parallel operation according to the
circulating reactive current minimisation procedure (∆I sin ϕ or
∆I sin ϕ (S)), the complete combination switches to an
emergency regulation which also works according to the ∆cos
ϕ procedure.
If a malfunction occurs, each Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring uses the last measured cos ϕ and
attempts to both maintain the voltage within the specified
voltage band and to approach the last measured cosϕ as
closely as possible.
Operating Transformer boundary conditions
mode
Parallel
operation
on the
busbar
Prerequisites
on the Relay
Voltage
change per
tap-change
Nominal
power
Deviation
of the relative
short circuit
voltages
no change
no change
or various
≤ 10 %
None
possible
required
required
Master
Slave/MSI
no change or
no change
various
≤ 10 %
parametisable
required
possible
required
∆Isinϕ
no change or
various
≤ 10 %
parametisable
required
possible
required
∆Isinϕ (S)
no change or
various
parametisable
required
possible
possible
∆cosϕ
various
Parallel
no change or no change
operation on
various
or various
a network
REG-DA operating manual
Maximum tapCurrent
TapBus
change
measurem
changing connection
difference when
ent
possible available
in operation
available
REG-DTMREG-DAPrograms
151
REG-DA
Circuit diagram (schematic)
* see next page
9.1
152
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The circuit diagram shows the parallel switching of two
transformers with the most important connections. The
principle is the same for three transformers and more.
Please observe that the voltage and current transformers do
not have to be connected in the shown manner. Every possible
type of connection of the individual conductors is possible.
However, it is important to ensure that the transformer
configuration or switching status for carrying out
measurements has been entered in SETUP 5, F2.
*
Please observe the contact load at R1 and R2!
110 V DC
230 V AC
20 A Switch on
5 A @ cosϕ = 1
5 A Hold
3 A @ cosϕ = 0.4
0.4 A Switch off
REG-DA operating manual
153
REG-DA
9.2
Programs for parallel operation and their
prerequisites
Caution!
It is particularly important to note that only REG-DA
Relays for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitorings
with the same firmware version can be operated in
parallel.
Otherwise errors can occur during operation.
The current firmware version can be displayed using the
Relays keypad.
Please press the menu key until you have
reached SETUP 6. The Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring status page can be selected
using F5.
The firmware version is displayed in the first two lines,
e.g. V2.01 on 01.02.04.
If different versions are installed, please download the
current firmware version from our website (www.aeberle.de or www.regsys.de) or telephone us.
9.2.1
Preparation
The following description defines both the preparations to be
carried out for manual activation as well as those necessary for
automatic activation of parallel switching.
For demonstrating each individual operating step, a system has
been selected which consists of three transformers feeding on
one busbar.
The master-slave procedure has been chosen as the parallel
program.
If another program with a different number of transformers is
selected, please adapt each operating step correspondingly.
In order to permit the master to check at any time whether the
slaves are working correctly, it is necessary that each Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is supplied with the
tap-change position of “its” transformer and that the bus
connection (E-LAN) is activated between all the Relays.
154
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
9.2.1.1 Explanation of terminology
Preparing manual activation
“Preparing manual activation” refers to the sequence of
consecutive switching operations which prepare for the parallel
operation of several transformers (adjusting the tap-change
position, adding circuit breakers, disconnectors and couplings)
as well as the actual manual activation of the parallel regulation.
In this case parallel regulation can be activated via the menu
(SETUP 5, Add-On 6) or via a binary input signal.
Preparing for automatic activation
“Preparing automatic activation” refers to the simultaneous and
automatic activation of the parallel operation of several
transformers as a function of the logical position (off/on) of all of
the circuit breakers, disconnectors and couplings.
This type of preparation can be carried out by feeding a busbar
replica (positions of the circuit breakers, disconnectors, bus ties
and bus couplings) to each one of the Relays involved in the
regulation.
On the basis of the switching statuses, the regulation system
can automatically recognise which transformer is supposed to
work with which other transformer(s) on one busbar in parallel
operation.
The transformers are then regulated according to the selected
regulating procedure.
REG-DA operating manual
155
REG-DA
9.2.2
Preparing manual activation
The following steps are required to set up the parallel-switching
of 3 transformers according to the master-slave procedure.
If two transformers or even four transformers are required,
please adapt the procedure correspondingly.
Note
In this chapter parameterisation will be carried out using
the membrane keypad of the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring.
Of course, the individual operation steps may also be
performed using the WinREG parameterisation
software.
1. Step
Switch all Relays to the MANUAL mode.
2. Step
Assign station identification.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
assigned to transformer 1 is given the station code (address)
<A>, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
assigned to transformer 2 is given the station code (address)
<B>, and the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring assigned to transformer 3 is given the station code
<C>.
Code input:
Select SETUP 6, F1, F2.
A to Z4
156
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
This address may be incremented using the F1 and F2 keys or
decremented using the F4 and F5 keys.
Confirm your selection using <Enter>.
Each address in the range A ... Z4 is permitted, however each
station code may only be assigned once.
If the PAN-D voltage monitoring unit is assigned to a REG-DA
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring, the Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will automatically
assign a code to its corresponding PAN-D.
To assign this address, the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring increments its own address (by one!)
and assigns it to the PAN-D.
Example:
If the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring has
the code <A>, it will assign the code <A1> to the PAN-D. If the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring has the
code <B9>, it will assign the code <C> to the PAN-D.
3. Step
Establish the connection to the bus.
To start the parallel operation, all participating Relays must be
able to communicate with each other via E-LAN.
This requires that the bus link (2-conductor or 4-conductor bus)
is connected in the line-to-line or standard bus structure.
Once the hardware prerequisites are fulfilled, the bus link must
be parameterised [see "E-LAN (Energy-Local Area Network)"
on page 101].
REG-DA operating manual
157
REG-DA
4. Step
Parallel program selection
Select SETUP 1, F5.
After pressing the F2 key, select the master-slave regulation
procedure.
Õ
Õ
This setting is only required for the master − which usually has
the address <A> − because all of the other stations will
automatically be declared as slaves when the group list is input
(see Step 5).
Slaves are to be assigned the parallel program “none''.
158
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
5. Step
Input the group list
The codes of all of the Relays participating in the parallel
operation are listed in the group list.
Select SETUP 1, F5, F1, F5
Please press F1, F2 and F3 to parameterise the Relays in the
first, second and third positions with the codes <A>, <B> and
<C> respectively.
If the group list can be entered in the manner described, then
as a rule it can generally be guaranteed that the bus link will
work properly.
It is not necessary to input a regulative influence for the selected
procedure.
6. Step
Parallel switching activation
There are several different ways to activate the parallelswitching operation:
➪ Activation via the keypad
➪ Activation via the binary input (level-controlled)
➪ Activation via binary input (pulse-controlled)
➪ Activation via IEC ..., RS 232, ...
REG-DA operating manual
159
REG-DA
Activation via the keypad
Please select SETUP 5, F1, Add-On 6
Pressing down the F2 function key activates the parallelswitching operation.
Õ
Õ
Select “ON”.
Parallel operation is active in the automatic mode as long as the
“Parallel Progr. Activation” is “ON”.
If you prefer to activate the parallel-switching operation via a
binary input instead of via the menu, the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring offers two options:
The parallel operation can be activated by via a level-controlled
or a pulse-controlled input.
“Level-controlled activation” means that the parallel-switching
operation is activated as long as the potential is at the selected
input. It will be switched off as soon as the potential at the
selected input drops off.
In “pulse-controlled” activation, the parallel operation is
switched on by the first pulse. The next pulse switches it off and
so on.
If the parallel-switching operation is to be deactivated using a
binary input, please carry out the following procedure:
Select the trigger input.
All freely programmable inputs with the exception of E5 and E6
may be used as the trigger or release input.
160
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The following example demonstrates how to activate the
parallel-switching operation via input E7.
Select SETUP 5, F3, F1
Õ
Õ
Press the F4 key and select the “Par Prog” function in the
framed field in the middle of the display.
Accept the setting by pressing <Enter>.
The parallel-switching operation can now be activated via
binary input E7.
For an optical signal that the parallel-switching operation has
been activated, please select SETUP5, F5.
In the following example, the status “operating in parallel
activated” is to be indicated using the freely programmable LED
4.
REG-DA operating manual
161
REG-DA
Press the F5 key and select the “Par Prog” function in the
framed field in the middle of the display.
Õ
Õ
Accept the setting for LED 4 by pressing <Enter>.
If the present status of the parallel switching operation (ON/
OFF) is to be fed back to the potential-free contact, please
select a free relay (R3 to R11) using the F4 key in the SETUP 5
menu and also assign the Par Prog parameter to this relay.
If the parallel operation is to be activated or deactivated in a
level-controlled or pulse-controlled manner, please select the
preferred activation method (level or pulse) in SETUP 5, F1,
Add-On 6 using the F2 key.
7. Step
Switch the circuit breakers, bus ties, bus couplings and
disconnectors according to the planned parallel-switching
operation.
8. Step
Switch all of the Relays to the AUTO mode.
The master first sets all of the slaves to its actual tap-changer
position in order to start the voltage regulation.
In normal operation, the voltage is held within the permissible
regulative deviation (bandwidth) and all transformers involved
are regulated to the same tap-changer position.
162
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
9.2.3
Preparing automatic activation
The ParaGramer can be loaded from the start menu as a tool
for preparing the automatic activation and for displaying the
switching status in real time.
The artificial word ParaGramer is derived from the terms parallel
and one-line diagram.
The ParaGramer displays the switching status of the individual
transformers in a one-line diagram and can be loaded from the
start menu using the F5 key, provided that the ParaGramer
feature has been activated.
Normally up to six transformers can be operated using the
ParaGramer.
In a special version, however, up to 10 transformers can be
connected.
The function is activated by feeding a complete busbar replica
(circuit breakers, disconnectors, bus ties and bus couplings) of
“its” transformer into each Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring.
The regulation system can automatically recognise which
transformer is to work with which other transformer(s) on a
busbar in parallel operation on the basis of the switching
statuses.
Busbars that are connected via bus coupling(s) are treated as
one single busbar by the system.
The standard ParaGramer version can display the following
configurations:
➪ 2 transformers with one busbar
(1 circuit breaker (LS) per transformer)
Note
= Switching element
open
LS
= Switching element
closed
REG-DA operating manual
163
REG-DA
➪ 3 transformers with one busbar
(1 circuit breaker (CB) per transformer)
CB
➪ 2 transformers with two busbars
(1 circuit breaker (CB) and 2 isolators (IS per transformer)
CB
IS
➪ 3 transformers with two busbars
(1 circuit breaker and 2 isolators per transformer)
164
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Busbars “1” and “2” can additionally be disconnected or
coupled by means of line coupler (SC) or bar coupler (CP).
The logical status of the couplings may also be fed to the Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring and is included in
the assignment algorithm (who with whom?).
CP
SC
The following abbreviations have been selected to clearly
characterise each individual switch, disconnector, etc.:
The prefix PG stands for ParaGramer. All of the other abbreviated
terms are listed below:
❑ PG_CB:
Circuit breaker return signal of the corresponding
transformer
❑ PG_IS1:
Isolator 1 return signal of the corresponding transformer to
busbar 1 (the left isolator in each figure)
❑ PG_IS2:
Isolator 2 return signal of the corresponding transformer to
busbar 2 (the right isolator in each figure)
❑ PG_CP:
Bus coupling return signal of the corresponding transformer
❑ PG_SC1:
Line coupler return signal right of the corresponding
transformer in busbar 1
❑ PG_SC2:
Line coupler return signal right of the corresponding
transformer in busbar 2
REG-DA operating manual
165
REG-DA
1. Step
Switch all Relays to the MANUAL mode.
2. Step
Assign station identification.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
assigned to transformer 1 is given the station code (address)
<A>, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
assigned to transformer 2 is given the station code (address)
<B>, and the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring assigned to transformer 3 is given the station code
<C>.
Code input:
Select SETUP 6, F1, F2.
A to Z4
This address may be incremented using the F1 and F2 keys or
decremented using the F4 and F5 keys.
Confirm your selection using <Enter>.
Each address in the range A ... Z4 is permitted, however each
station code may only be assigned once.
If the PAN-D voltage monitoring unit is assigned to a REG-DA
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring, the Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will automatically
assign a code to its corresponding PAN-D.
To assign this address, the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring increments its own address (by one!)
and assigns it to the PAN-D.
166
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Example:
If the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring has
the code <A>, it will assign the code <A1> to the PAN-D. If the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring has the
code <B5>, it will assign the code <B6> to the PAN-D.
3. Step
Establish the connection to the bus.
To start the parallel operation, all parallel-operating Relays must
be able to communicate with each other via E-LAN.
This requires that the bus link (2-conductor or 4-conductor bus)
is connected in the line-to-line or standard bus structure.
The bus link must be parameterised [see "E-LAN (Energy-Local
Area Network)" on page 101] once the hardware prerequisites
are fulfilled.
4. Step
Activate the ParaGramer.
Please select SETUP 5, F1, Add-On 6, F5 and activate the
ParaGramer by selecting the number of transformers operating
in parallel.
For three parallel-operating transformers select: ON-3
REG-DA operating manual
167
REG-DA
5. Step
Parameterisation of the group list.
The number of participating parallel-operating transformers
(n=3) is specified by inputting the group list.
The group list is numbered consecutively and each Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring must be
parameterised in the same order. The Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring of the first transformer must be first in
the group list, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring of the second transformer second in the group list,
etc. The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring ID
may be freely selected as described above. For clarity,
however, the first Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring should be assigned code A:, Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring 2 code B:, etc.
The group list also specifies the number of transformers shown
in the ParaGramer mode (2 positions in the group list occupied
=> 2 transformers, 3 positions occupied => 3 transformers,
etc.).
The group list also indicates which Relays are presently working
together:
Three symbols (+,*,=), which appear before the group list entry
have been introduced to characterise the parallel-operating
transformers. Relays with the same symbol are presently
feeding on one busbar.
The following procedure should be carried out for each Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring:
Setup 1
<F5> “Programs”
<F1> “Par. Parameters”
<F5> “E-LAN group list”, => Enter the stations
168
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
6. Step
Parallel program selection
Select SETUP 1, F5.
After pressing the F2 key, select the master-slave regulation
procedure.
Õ
Õ
This setting is only required for the master - usually with the
address <A>, because all of the other participants will
automatically be declared as followers when the group list is
input.
Slaves should be assigned the parallel program “none''.
7. Step
Input assignments
The individual programmable binary Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring inputs are prepared for their respective
tasks in this step.
REG-DA operating manual
169
REG-DA
If, for instance, the disconnector PG_TR1 of transformer 1 is to
be assigned to the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring input E8, the function PG_TR1 must be assigned to
input E 8 using menu SETUP 5, F3 “Input assignments...” and
the function keys.
This same procedure applies for all of the other inputs as well.
Depending on the input assignment, the display can show one
or two busbars.
The following input functions are available:
❑ PG_CB:
Circuit breaker return signal of the corresponding
transformer
❑ PG_IS1:
Isolator 1 return signal of the corresponding transformer to
busbar 1 (the left isolator in each figure)
❑ PG_IS2:
Isolator 2 return signal of the corresponding transformer to
busbar 2 (the right isolator in each figure)
❑ PG_CP:
Bus coupling return signal of the corresponding transformer
❑ PG_SC1:
Line coupler return signal right of the corresponding
transformer in busbar 1
❑ PG_SC2:
Line coupler return signal right of the corresponding
transformer in busbar 2
Note
A solution is also available for applications in which the
busbars are coupled crosswise.
The “crosslink” feature makes it easy to master this task.
This type of busbar arrangement is not described here
since it is not used very frequently. If it is required,
please contact our headquarters. This option is already
available on your Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring and can be activated at any
time using the Firmware feature.
170
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Inputs which are not in use are assigned a default setting. This
makes it possible to also display system diagrams which do not
correspond to the maximum possible configuration with one
circuit breaker, two disconnectors, one bus coupling and two
bus ties per transformer.
Summary of the default settings:
❑ 1 busbar:
PG_CB:
open
PG_IS1:
closed, however not displayed in the
ParaGramer
❑ 2 busbars:
PG_CB:
closed
PG_IS1:
open
PG_IS2:
open
PG_CP:
open
PG_SC1:
closed
PG_SC2:
closed
The displays to be shown are changed according to the criteria
listed below:
➪ If the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring in
the third position in the group list is assigned a freely
selected PG_xxx parameter, three transformers will be
displayed in a circuit diagram instead of two.
➪ If PG_IS2 is used on a Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring entered in the group, two busbars
will be displayed in a circuit diagram instead of one.
➪ If either PG_CP, PG_SC1 or PG_SC2 is used on a Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring entered in the
group, the bus ties and bus couplings will be activated in
the display.
REG-DA operating manual
171
REG-DA
8. Step
Displaying the busbar replica
Depending on the parameterised group list, the overview
screen will display two to six relays. In addition to the
ParaGramer overview, it is also possible to select a detailed
display.
Selection summary:
<MENU>, <F5> => ParaGramer summary
Selecting the switching status:
<F5> Switching status/overview
Use “<” and “>” to scroll in the Switching status view.
9. Step
Switch all of the relays to the AUTO operating mode.
The parallel operation is activated automatically.
Various checks are included in order to ensure that the
regulation works safely in all circumstances
This means that the bus connection is also always monitored
as well as the tap-change positon of the transformers operating
in parallel.
If, for example, a tap-change position is reported that is not
logical (TapErr) or a Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring in the system cannot be addressed (ParErr), the
regulation is stopped immediately and the corresponding error
flag is set.
For information about TapErr and ParErr see "Description of the
ParErr and TapErr error flags" on page 184.
172
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
9.3
Parallel operation using the “Master-SlaveIndependent (MSI)” procedure
(available as of Version 2.03 from the 16th July 2004)
Note
All of the control technology information about TapErr
and ParErr also applies to the master-slave operation
carried out according to any activation procedure.
MSI stands for Master (M), Slave (S) and Independent (I)
operation of individual transformers.
In this operating mode, all of the participating parallel-switching
transformers are placed by the operator in one of the states
described above. Transformers then always work according to
the principle of equalising the tap-changer positions, which is
also called the master-slave procedure.
Note
The terms master-follower and master-slave are used
synonymously is everyday language and that is also the
case in the following text.
Please note:
➪ In the MSI mode, it is only possible to change the operating
mode (MSI) of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring when in the manual mode.
➪ When the transformers are already operating in parallel, it is
possible to switch from the AUTO mode to the MANUAL
mode by switching any Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring to the MANUAL mode.
This therefore ensures that the entire group can quickly be
switched to the manual mode in the event of a fault.
➪ In the Auto mode, the group can only then be switched if the
master is switched to the AUTO mode; the slaves will not
accept being switched from MANUAL to AUTO.
➪ In the independent mode, on the other hand, each Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can be switched
back and forth from MANUAL to AUTO at any time.
➪ The status line of the ParaGramer display indicates which
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
currently functioning as the master.
REG-DA operating manual
173
REG-DA
It is also possible to indicate the operating status using an LED.
If the parameter MSI-Ma is assigned to a particular LED, it lights
up when the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring is operating in master mode. The same procedure
can also be carried out for slave operation (parameter = MSI_Sl)
or independent operation (parameter = MSI_Ind).
The parameterisation is also displayed in the ParaGramer and
the individual transformers are designated by the letters M, S
and I.
All of the transformers/relays working as either a master or a
slave are displayed with a closed coupling. On the other hand,
relays working in the independent mode (currently feeding on a
different busbar or in the stand-by mode) are displayed with an
open coupling.
If more than one Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring has been mistakenly assigned to the master mode,
the MSI algorithm will treat the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring with the lowest address (A is lower than
B or C!) as the “master” and will treat all of the other relays
mistakenly defined as being masters as slaves.
The ParaGramer display will also show the present status of the
parallel operation in the status line in the form of the measured
voltage, the calculated regulative deviation and the tap-changer
position in addition to the “Who with whom?” information.
This makes it possible to obtain all of the information needed to
evaluate the parallel operation.
174
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Prerequisite for using the MSI operation
The MSI operating mode can only be applied when the
ParaGramer feature is activated and turned on.
Relays which are delivered with the K1 feature (with parallel
operation) are already parameterised in this way by default.
The ParaGramer is switched on by selecting SETUP 5, Add-On
6.
Press F5 to specify the number of transformers to be switched
in parallel.
Note
At this point it is important to state explicitly that the
ParaGramer has a different function in MSI mode.
It does not generate the group lists itself, but is only
activated in order to make it possible to display the
switching status on the regulator display.
Example:
The ParaGramer must be set to ON-3 for a group of three
transformers.
The MSI operating mode can be selected by choosing the MSI
operating mode in SETUP 1, Programs..., Parallel Program.
Caution!
The MSI operating mode must be selected for each
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
involved in the parallel-switching operation.
We advise contacting our company headquarters if the K1
feature and, therefore, also the Paragramer, are to be enabled
at a later date.
REG-DA operating manual
175
REG-DA
To verify the present settings, please select
SETUP 6, F5 (Status), --> Page 2 of the device status.
Note
Several features, e.g. RECORDER, TMM, etc. can, of
course, be loaded at the same time.
Further prerequisites for using the MSI procedure:
Only transformers which are electrically (power, short circuit
voltage, voltage between the tap-changer positions, switching
groups, etc.) and mechanically identical (number of tapchanger positions, position of the deadband) are suitable for
MSI operation.
A different procedure should be used if one or more of the
parameters differ.
In addition, it must be ensured that each Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring receives the information
regarding the tap-change position of “its” transformer.
The recording and transmission of the correct tap-change
position is one of the mandatory prerequisites of the tapchange equalisation procedure.
Every potential “candidate” must be listed in the group list with
its address in order to notify the system of the number of relays/
transformers that should take part in parallel operation.
176
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Please select the sub-menu “Parallel Parameters” in
SETUP 1.
Method:
SETUP 1 / Programs... (F5) / “Par. Parameters” (F1)
The group list must be set up in the “Par. Parameters“ menu.
Please select the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring with the lowest address by pressing the F1 key in
the first group position of the list. Then place the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring with the next highest
address in the second position in the list.
Continue in the same manner for all of the relays currently
involved in the parallel-switching operation as well as for those
that will be later in the parallel switching operation later.
Selecting the operating modes
Three different methods can be used to select operating
modes.
1.
via the binary input
2.
via the membrane keypad (F3 … F5)
3.
via the (serial) control system
Method 1:
Select three free inputs per Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring and assign the Master (MSI_Ma), Slave
(MSI_Sl) or Independent (MSI_Ind) functions to them using
SETUP 5, F3 or by using WinREG.
REG-DA operating manual
177
REG-DA
Example:
IT should be possible to select the operating mode using inputs
E9 to E11.
The following is displayed in SETUP 5, F3:
A signal transmitted to input E-9 will cause the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring to work as the master.
The present status is indicated by an X in the square brackets.
The results of this parameterisation:
This status is indicated on both the regulator display as well as
on the ParaGramer.
178
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Method 2:
Selection via the membrane keypad is only possible in the
ParaGramer.
For this reason it is necessary to first return to the main menu.
Then press the F5 key to select the ParaGramer display mode.
The symbol
in the status line has been assigned to the F1 key.
Press F1 and select the desired operating mode using F3, F4
and F5.
Information regarding effective manoeuvring on the screen can
be found under “i” by pressing the F2 key.
REG-DA operating manual
179
REG-DA
Note
The mode cannot be overwrittten via the keypad if a
specific mode is pre-selected via the binary input and a
signal is present at the input.
The mode that was most recently assigned an input is
always pre-selected. Since the inputs are triggered via
the edge of the input signal, one short pulse is sufficient
to select the operating mode.
Method 3:
Selection of the individual relays is carried out via a serial
interface (IEC…, DNP 3.0, MODBUS, SPA-Bus; via LWL or
copper).
A further prerequisite for fault-free operation is that all of the
relays have the same parameterisation.
For this reason, different parameters must be set in SETUPs 1
and 5.
Since the slaves in the master-slaves procedure are only
allowed a limited freedom of action, changes in the parameters
can only be carried out in the independent mode or the master
mode.
For this reason, the parameterisation should already have been
completed in SETUP 5 before commencing work in SETUP 1.
Please note:
First SETUP 5, then SETUP 1
Select SETUP 5, F1…, (Add-On 6).
The following parameters can be entered:
180
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Explanations of the individual menu items:
“Parallel Prog. activation” must be set to ON to activate parallel
operation.
The indication “1st ParErr after n·tap-changer in operation time”
can be interpreted as follows.
If the system is already operating in parallel with n stations, it
assumes that the equalisation of the tap-change positions of all
operating transformers is achieved after a maximum of
1.5 · n · the tap-changer in operation time.
If there is an error in the transmission of the BCD code or if there
are problems regarding the equalisation of the tap-changer
positions, a tap-changer position error (TapErr) will be detected
which causes the system to stop.
However, if a transformer, which (for example) has been feeding
another busbar or has been working in the stand-by mode, is
selected to participate in the parallel-switching operation, this
parameter can be used to specify the number of tap-changes
it may deviate from the parallel transformers that are already
running.
This transformer is then brought to the same tap-changer
position as the transformers which are already operating in
parallel, one step at a time and without interrupting regulation.
If equalisation doesn’t occur within the pre-selected time, the
parallel-switching is stopped and all participating relays switch
to MANUAL mode.
Example:
The transformer/relay <D> to be added to the parallel-switching
operation is currently set to the resting position in tap-changer
position 4.
The group switched in parallel is currently working in tapchanger position 8 and the motor running time between two
tap-changer positions is 7 seconds.
If you want to add transformer <D> to the parallel-switched
group − without considering the resulting circulating reactive
currents − the “1st ParErr after n·tap-changer in operation time”
parameter must be set to 4.
The monitoring algorithm of the parallel program will wait an
interval of 4 times the tap-changer in operation time of the
added transformer (4 x 7 seconds = 28 seconds) before a
parallel error (ParErr) is triggered.
REG-DA operating manual
181
REG-DA
Under normal conditions, the new station can be “brought” to
the tap-changer position of the group within this specified
interval.
If this is not possible, the error flag ParErr will be set and the
entire group will be switched to the MANUAL mode.
The MANUAL operating mode is the fail-safe position for all of
the master-slave procedures.
The group can only be switched back to the AUTO mode via
the master after the error which triggered the ParErr has been
rectified.
The number of transformers/relays involved in the parallelswitching operation can be selected with the help of the
“ParaGramer Activity” parameter.
Example:
If three transformers/relays are to be switched in parallel,
“ParaGramer Activity”
3
must be selected by pressing F5.
Settings in SETUP 1
Several settings must be carried out in Setup 1.
Under normal conditions − all of the transformers are the same
− the settings for the “permissible regulative deviation” (F1), the
“time factor” (F2) and the “setpoint value” (F3) should all be the
same.
However, if you prefer to have different setpoint values
activated when changing masters, different setpoint values can
also be specified.
However, during the parallel-switching operation, only the
setpoint value parameterised in the currently active master is
taken into consideration.
Different setpoint values can naturally also be selected even if
the setpoint values originally had the same parameterisation. To
182
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
do this, the setpoint value of the active master is changed via
the binary input, the program or the serial interface.
Select SETUP 1, F5 (Programs).
Select the parallel program “MSI” using the F2 key.
All of the preparations necessary for the parallel-switching
operation have now been carried out. Proceed in the MANUAL
mode by changing the transformers until the voltage is outside
of the tolerance band. Then switch to AUTO mode to verify
whether the parallel-switching operation is functioning properly.
It is only functioning properly if the voltage returns to the
tolerance band within a short period of time and all of the
transformers are set to the same tap-changer position.
We recommend carrying out this test for both positive and
negative regulative deviations.
REG-DA operating manual
183
REG-DA
9.3.1
Trouble-shooting
Parallel-switching operations carried out according to the MSI
procedure can only function properly, if − in addition to the
correct functioning of the participating Relays − the
infrastructure (recording and signalling of the tap-changer
position, bus connection) are also functioning fault-free.
To ensure that errors that could occur outside of the relays do
not cause problems for maintaining the voltage, the two error
flags ParErr and TapErr have been introduced to monitor the
recording of the tap-changer position and the bus connection
respectively.
9.3.1.1 Description of the ParErr and TapErr error flags
A fault in the parallel-switching operation is signalled through
the ParErr and TapErr error bits.
ParErr
ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel
error) and automatically switches a group of transformers
operating in parallel from the Automatic operating mode to the
Manual operating mode. If a different behaviour is desired, this
can be specified through an alteration to the SYSCTR feature.
In this case please contact our headquarters.
ParErr is triggered, for example, when the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring is bypassed when a tapchanger regulation is carried out (the tap-changer position is set
directly at the motor drive or via the “remote control bypass”)
and the transformers are not all set back to the same tapchanger position within an interval that is 1.5 times the tapchange in operation time.
Exception: If a transformer with a specific tap difference is added
to the parallel-switching operation (independent becomes
slave), ParErr is not triggered until the interval specified in
SETUP 5, Add-On 6, “1st ParErr after n·tap-changer in
operation time” has been exceeded.
184
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
TapErr
TapErr is a signal that indicates a problem with the tap-change
position. The name is derived from the term “tap error”.
Like ParErr, TapErr affects the entire group when in MSI
operating mode.
If a transformer is being switched in parallel, regulation will stop
after 1.5 x the tap-changer in operation time if the tap-changer
positions have not reached the same level within this time.
We recommend individually assigning the TapErr and ParErr
error bits to an LED and/or a relay to inform the operating
personnel about the status of the parallel regulation and to thus
make it easier to rectify the error.
The following are considered to be tap errors:
1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction
Example:
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring outputs
a “raise” command and the transformer “answers” with a lower
tap-change or the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring outputs a “lower” command and the transformer
“answers” with a higher tap-change.
Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have
been swapped or the motor drive is behaving inversely.
Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring increases the transformer ratio in the
event of a higher tap-change, thus lowering the voltage.
In most cases, it is expected that an increase in the tap-changer
position results in a higher voltage, and a decrease in the tapchanger position results in a lower voltage.
Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals
REG-DA operating manual
185
REG-DA
2. No tap-change
Example:
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring outputs
a command, but the tap-changer position does not change.
In this case, it must be assumed that either the position
confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.
3. Illogical tap-changes
If no signal is received from the next higher or next lower tap
position after a raise or lower command is issued, the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring interprets this as a
fault in the tap-change operation and the TapErr flag is set.
As mentioned above, we recommend assigning the TapErr
error bit to an LED and/or a relay to inform the operating
personnel about the status of the parallel regulation and to thus
make it easier to rectify any error.
Tap limitation
If the tap is to be limited from either above or below, please
enter the following background program lines via the WinREG
terminal program:
H 7=‘RegStufe-,Lower tap limitation,<=,if,RegSperreT =3,
else,RegSperreT =0’
H 8=‘RegStufe-,Upper tap limitation,>=,if,RegSperreH =3,
else,RegSperreH =0’
In place of the “Upper tap limitation“, enter the required upper tap
limitation for your requirements and in place of the “Lower tap
limitation” enter the required lower tap limitation.
Note
The assignment of program lines H7 and H8 is arbitrary,
and you can use any two program lines of your choice.
186
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
10
Resistance Measuring Equipment for
Tap-Changers with Resistance-Coded
Tap-Change Signalling
Resistance input
If the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring is equipped with a “tap-change potentiomenter”
resistance input (Feature D2 or D3), the tap-changer resistance
network can be connected directly and interpreted as a tapchange by the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring.
This eliminates the complication of using an external resistance
measurement transducer.
The resistance chain receives a direct current from the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring via two terminals.
The voltage drop that occurs with the tap-change level is
measured using further terminals.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
normally connected in a 3-conductor circuit. Please contact
our company headquarters if a 4-conductor circuit is required.
The resistance measurement equipment consists of a
programmable current source to feed the measurement
resistor, and a voltage measurement device to measure the
voltage at the resistor. Tap-change resistances between 1 Ω
and 400 Ω can be measured. However, the total resistance
must remain ≤ 20 kΩ
The measurement result is output with a 12 bit resolution at a
refresh rate of approx 10 Hz (0.1 s).
The measurement device has a broken-wire detection system.
The parameters are input in an application menu using the
keypad.
Loading the application menu
The application menu appears when the enter key is pressed 1
to 6 times in one of the main menus (regulator measurement
transducer, recorder etc.).
REG-DA operating manual
187
REG-DA
Meaning of the lines in the menu
1. Line: dR is the nominal resistance between two levels
2. Line: is the highest measurable level
3. Line: is the lowest measurable level
10.1
Error detection
The error detection recognises the following errors:
➪ Interruption in the current loop
➪ Overloading of the current source
➪ Interruption of one or both of the feeder cables for the
voltage measurement input
➪ Measurement input overloaded
➪ Measurement range overshot
The resistance measurement value will be > RMAX for all
detectable faults.
Therefore RMAX should be measured so that the value is never
exceeded under normal conditions.
If an error occurs, an Infobox will be shown, which indicates the
error and the present measured resistance value.
10.2
Level detection
The level resistance value RS is a required input value.
The internal level N is calculated from the measured resistance
value RM using
R
N = Integer component ( M + 0.5)
RS
and displayed.
188
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The present measurement resistance value and the deviation,
∆Rn, of the present measurement resistance value from the
present level N as a percent of RS
(-50% ... 0 ... +50%) is shown in line 5 of the application menu.
RM
∆Rn = 100% ⋅ ⎛ ------- + 1-N )
⎝ RS
10.3
Pin assignment
3-conductor circuit
Connection Description
/ switch
3-conductor circuit
(please also see "Connection
options" on page 190)
23
Current cable to connection a
IK+:
Positive pole of the measurement resistance
current
source
25
UE-:
Measurement cable to connection b
of the measurement resistance
inv.
measurement
input
26
Current cable to connection b
IK-:
Negative pole of the measurement resistance
current
source
S:1.2
DIP switch
Both switches in ON position
Switch S1 is in the ON position of the positive pole of the
current source (IK+) and is connected to the non-inverted
voltage measurement input (UE+) for the 3-conductor circuit.
the current/measurement input to connection a of the
measurement resistance can therefore be connected to
terminal 23 or 24.
To prevent confusion, terminal 23 is always labelled in the
terminal and circuit diagrams.
REG-DA operating manual
189
REG-DA
4-conductor circuit
Connection Description
/ switch
4-conductor circuit
23
Current cable to connection a
IK+:
Positive pole of the measurement resistance
current
source
24
UE+:
Measurement cable to connection a
of the measurement resistance
non-inv.
Measurement
input
25
Measurement cable to connection b
UE-:
of the measurement resistance
inv.
measurement
input
26
Current cable to connection b
IK-:
Negative pole of the measurement resistance
current
source
S:1.2
DIP switch
10.4
Both switches in OFF position
Connection options
3-conductor
3 - L e i t e r s c h circuit
a ltu n g
4 - L e i t e r s c circuit
h a ltu n g
4-conductor
3-conductor circuit
S 1
2 3
IK
R
+
S 1
S 2
2 4
U
2 5
E +
2 6
U
E -
2 3
IK
R
L a
IK
-
R
L b
+
S 2
2 4
2 5
U
E +
190
N x R s
R La » R L
IK
-
R
L b
R s
a
b
b
E -
L a
R s
a
2 6
U
R
L a
, R
L b
£ 2 0 W
N x R s
R La ¹ R
b
L b
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
10.5
Setting of the DIP switch S1 and S2
3 conductor circuit
4 conductor circuit
S1
S2
S1
S2
on
on
off
off
10.5.1
Location of the switch on the circuit board: level 1
ON
OFF
REG-DA operating manual
191
REG-DA
11
mA-Inputs, mA-Outputs
The REG-D and REG-DA Relays for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring differ from one another in terms of
design and the basic configuration of the analogue inputs.
The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
is not provided with any analogue inputs, whereas the REG-DA
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is always
equipped with one analogue input module.
Both relays can optionally be upgraded with various additional
modules.
The following modules are available:
❑ Analogue input module with two mA inputs
❑ Analogue module with only one mA input
(only possible for the RG-DA)
❑ Analogue module with only one mA output
(only possible for the RG-DA)
❑ Analogue output module with two mA outputs
❑ PT100 module to connect a PT100 directly to a 3conductor circuit
❑ Resistance module as a tap-change potentiometer
(1 ... 400 Ω/tap-change)
(see chapter 10 for description)
The parameterisation of the inputs and outputs is the same for
both types of Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring and can be carried out using either the keypad or
the WinREG parameterisation software.
It is advantageous to carry out the parameterisation using
WinREG, since that is the simplest method to gain an overview
of all the various parameters.
However, parameterisation using the keypad is shown in the
example, since this gives an insight into the multiple
possibilities.
192
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
11.1
Analogue inputs
The individual steps are explained using an example.
Example:
In this example parameterisation is carried out on a REG-DA,
which is equipped with one mA input (Channel 1) as standard.
The tap-change of a transformer is delivered using a mA signal
and is connected to channel 1 of the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring.
The mA signal between 4 ... 20mA should represent a tapchange range of 1 to 17 tap-change positions.
How to proceed:
Assuming that you are in one of the display menus (regulator,
measurement transducer, etc.), select menu and then select
SETUP 6 using the arrow keys.
Press F1 to select General 1.
The submenus which are required for parameterising the
analogue channels can then be reached by pressing F5.
Press F5 ANALOGUE..
REG-DA operating manual
193
REG-DA
Õ
Up to 6 analogue channels can be selected using the arrow
keys (raise, lower).
The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
can be equipped with up to six channels, whereas the REG-DA
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can only
have a maximum of 4 analogue channels.
This statement is only true if no further analogue channels are
equipped using level II.
Up to 8 analogue channels can be contained on level II in the
maximum design.
The entry “channel 1 AI/ANA” (AI ➔ analogue input) and, for
example, “channel 3 AO/ANA” (AO ➔ analogue output) is
created automatically and shows that channel 1 is prepared as
an analogue input and that channel 3 is hardware-prepared as
an analogue output.
Select channel 1 (F2)
This is ASETUP 1, in which various characteristic quantities of
the input can be parameterised.
Õ
The analogue function can be selected using the F2 key.
194
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The following functions are available as standard:
Note
an “i” at the beginning of a line stands for input!
OFF
Input is turned off
ANA
Input is assigned a specific function using a
background program
iOilTp-TR
input: represents the oil temperature of the
transformer
iOilTp-TC
input: represents the oil temperature of the
tap-changer
iOilL-TR
input: represents the oil level
of the transformer
iOilL-TC
input: represents the oil level
of the tap-changer
iWater
input: represents the hydrogen content
(H2) in the oil
iGas
input: represents the amount of dissolved
gases in the oil
iTapPos
input: represents the tap-change position of the
transformer
Note
The quantities OilTp-TR and OilTp-TC must be supplied
using the PT100 module. The oil level, water and gas
measurement quantities can also only be handled if they
are available as mA signals from an appropriate sensor.
Select “iTapPos” using the F2 and F4 arrow keys and then
confirm the selection by pressing Enter.
Õ
Õ
REG-DA operating manual
195
REG-DA
Choose “Pos.” for position as the analogue unit
Press F3
Õ
The available character sets can be shown by pressing “abc”
(F1 key).
Select the appropriate letters using the arrow keys (up, down,
left, right) and confirm the selection by pressing Enter.
You can switch between upper and lower case by pressing F2.
F4 and F5 insert and delete a character respectively.
Decimal places are not required in this case since the tap-change
position is a whole-number quantity.
Õ
Press F4 and then reduce the number of decimal places to zero
by pressing F4 again.
196
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Confirm your selection by pressing Enter.
The type of characteristic line can be selected under the
“parameter selection” menu item.
The following settings are possible:
ALL
Only for special applications
related to old software versions.
Fac+Off
Only for special applications
related to old software versions.
P0P2
Linear characteristic line
P0P1P2
Bent characteristic line
P0P2 (linear characteristic line)
A linear characteristic line has two coordinates (beginning and
end) which can be described using the points P0 and P2.
Each point is specified using an x coordinate and a y
coordinate.
The characteristic lines are so constructed that mA values
(input or output) are always placed on the y axis in normalised
form.
The upper limit of the mA input or output is always determined
by the specific hardware configuration. Therefore a normalised
representation is sensible.
Example:
0 ... 20 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1
4 ... 20 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0.2 and Y2 = 1
0 ... 5 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1
0 ... 10 V is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1
REG-DA operating manual
197
REG-DA
y
P2-y
P0-y
P2
P0
P0-x
P2-x
x
P0P1P2 (bent characteristic line)
Bent characteristic lines can also be displayed.
In this case, the point P1 must be entered, which is defined as
lying between points P0 and P2.
y
P2-y
P2
P1-y
P0-y
P1
P0
P0-x
198
P1-x
P2-x
x
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
A bent characteristic line is selected for the following tasks.
Select “P0P2” using F2 or F4 and confirm the selection by
pressing Enter.
Õ
Õ
Proceed to the next menu, ASETUP2, by pressing the right
arrow key.
Õ
The coordinates for the characteristic line are input in this menu.
The characteristic line points P0 and P2 are defined via
coordinate pairs P0-X (output quantity at start of the line), P0-Y
(input quantities at the start of the line)
P2-X (output quantity at the start of the line) and P2-Y (input
quantity at the end of the line).
REG-DA operating manual
199
REG-DA
y
P2-y (1)
P2
P0-y (0.2)
P0
1
P0-x
17
P2-x
x/tap-ch
Proceed to the next menu, ASETUP3, by pressing the right
arrow key.
Õ
This SETUP defines how the analogue input should behave if
the region boundaries are exceeded.
The following choices are available under “Limit Handling”
None
High
Low
High+Low
200
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Explanations:
None:
no limiting,
neither up nor down
High:
Limiting, upwards only
Practical meaning:
In the selected example, the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring
would display tap-change position 17, if the
upstream measurement transducer overcontrols and outputs,
for example, 24mA instead of 20mA.
Low:
Limiting, downwards only
Practical meaning:
In the selected example, the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring
would display tap-change position 1, if the
upstream measurement transducer
outputs only 0mA instead of 4mA.
Recommendation:
In the case of inputs 4 ... 20mA, the lower limit
should not be activated, otherwise
important information may be lost.
If the input signal
value falls below 4 mA, the display remains at
tap-change position 1.
If the limiting is not
active, the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring displays tap-change
position 99, which could easily be
mis-interpreted as an error signal.
High + Low:
Limits both upwards and downwards
Practical meaning:
see above
One can decide individually in each case if the
limiting function is helpful or not.
A general recommendation can
therefore not be given for this reason.
REG-DA operating manual
201
REG-DA
The menu item “Input resolution” is only for information
purposes. It displays the resolution with which the input signal
is further internally processed.
In this case 0.05%.
You can return to the ANALOGUE I/O menu by pressing the
Esc key.
If the left arrow key is pressed in this menu, the actual input and
output values of the analogue values are displayed.
AnaR 1 then displays the actual value 20 mA if 20 mA is flowing
in the input.
(AnaR 1= 20 mA).
Pressing the left arrow key again displays the normalised value
of the input quantity.
If 20 mA hardware is being used, then the normalised value
AnaN 1 = 1 if 20 mA is flowing, and AnaN 1 = 0.2 if only 4 mA
is flowing.
202
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
11.2
Analogue outputs
For general information about the analogue channels, see Page
192.
The individual steps are explained using an example.
Task: The tap-change position of the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring should be output as a mA signal.
i.e. Tap-change positions 0 to 17 ➔ 4 ... 20 mA
How to proceed:
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring must
be equipped with an analogue output module (in the example
with a double module for channels 3 and 4).
Assuming that you are in one of the display menus (regulator,
transducer, etc.), select menu and then select SETUP 6 using
the arrow keys.
Press F1 to select General 1.
REG-DA operating manual
203
REG-DA
The submenus which are required for parameterising the
analogue channels can then be reached by pressing F5.
Õ
Up to 6 analogue channels can be selected using the arrow
keys (raise, lower).
The REG-D Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
can be equipped with up to six channels, whereas the REG-DA
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can only
have a maximum of 4 analogue channels.
This statement is only true if no further analogue channels are
equipped using level II.
Up to 8 analogue channels can be contained on level II in the
maximum design.
The entry “channel 1 AI/ANA” (AI ➔ analogue input) and
“channel X AO/ANA” (AO ➔ analogue output) is created
automatically and shows that channel 1 has an analogue input
(AI) and that channel 3 and 4, for example, is hardwareprepared as an analogue output (AO).
Select channel 3 (F4)
Õ
This is ASETUP1 in which the analogue function, analogue
units, decimal places and the parameter selection can be
entered.
204
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The analogue function can be selected using the F2 key.
The following functions are available as standard:
Note
„o” at the beginning of the line stands for output !
OFF
Output is turned off
ANA
Output is assigned a specific function using a
background program
oZero
“0” is output
o+FullRng
The upper limit is output (e.g. 20 mA)
o-FullRng
The starting value is output
(e.g. -20 mA)
Note
The three functions can be used to check the output
type (e.g. 20 mA output or 10 mA output) and its
function.
oU
The measured voltage
is displayed as an output
oP
The measured active power
is displayed as an output
oQ
The measured reactive power
is displayed as an output
oS
The measured apparent power
is displayed as an output
oU1
The measured voltage U1
is displayed as an output
oU2
The measured voltage U2
is displayed as an output
REG-DA operating manual
205
REG-DA
Note
The following applies for the REG-DA Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring:
U1: Voltage between terminals 2 and 5
U2: Voltage between terminals 8 and 10
Whereas for the REG-D Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring the following applies:
The connection points for U1 and U2 can be found in the
planning documents (see appendix).
ol1
The measured current in conductor 1
is displayed as an output
ol2
The measured current in conductor 2
is displayed as an output
ol3
The measured current in conductor 3
is displayed as an output
oPHIDEG
The measured phase angle phi
is displayed as an output
oOCOSPHI
The measured cos phi
is displayed as an output
oFREQ
The measured frequency
is displayed as an output
oOilTemp
The measured oil temperature
is displayed as an output
oWindTemp
the calculated hotpoint temperature
is displayed as an output
oTapPos
The present tap-change position of the
transformer is displayed as an output
Please select oTapPos as an analogue function.
Õ
Õ
Confirm your selection by pressing Enter.
206
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Analogue unit:
In this case and in most other cases, the analogue unit is fixed,
i.e. the system automatically applies the correct unit (“V” for
voltage, “A” for current and “Hz” for frequency).
However, the unit can be freely selected if ANA is selected.
In such cases, please proceed as described below:
Press F3
Õ
The available character sets can be shown by pressing “abc”
(F1 key).
Select the appropriate letters using the arrow keys (up, down,
left, right) and confirm the selection by pressing Enter.
You can switch between upper and lower case by pressing F2.
F4 and F5 insert and delete a character respectively.
REG-DA operating manual
207
REG-DA
The measurement can be additionally influenced through the
choice of decimal places (F4). For a 20 mA output the second
decimal place represents a value of 0.01%.
If only one decimal place is selected all output values of the
order of 0.01% are surpressed and there is a certain “calming”
of the output.
Select the number of decimal places appropriate to the task.
Õ
Confirm your selection by pressing Enter.
The type of characteristic line can be selected under the
“parameter selection” menu item.
The following settings are possible:
208
ALL
Only for special applications
related to old software versions.
Fac+Off
Only for special applications
related to old software versions.
P0P2
Linear characteristic line
P0P1P2
Bent characteristic line
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
P0P2
A linear characteristic line has two points (beginning and end)
which can be described using the points P0 and P2.
Each point is specified using an x coordinate and a y
coordinate.
The characteristic lines are constructed in such a way that mA
values (input or output) are always placed on the y axis in
normalised form.
The upper limit of the mA input or output is always determined
by the specific hardware configuration.
Therefore a normalised representation is sensible.
Example:
0 ... 20 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1
4 ... 20 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0.2 and Y2 = 1
0 ... 5 mA is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1
0 ... 10 V is displayed as Y0 = 0 and Y2 = 1
y
P2-y
P0-y
P2
P0
P0-x
REG-DA operating manual
P2-x
x
209
REG-DA
P0P1P2
Bent characteristic lines can also be displayed.
In this case, the point P1 must be entered, which is defined as
lying between points P0 and P2.
y
P2
P2-y
P1-y
P1
P0-y
P0
P1-x
P0-x
P2-x
x
A bent characteristic line is selected for the following tasks.
Select “P0P2” using F2 or F4 and confirm the selection by
pressing Enter.
Õ
Õ
Proceed to the next menu, ASETUP2, by pressing the right
arrow key.
Õ
210
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The coordinates for the characteristic line are input in this menu.
The characteristic line points P0 and P2 are defined via
coordinate pairs P0-X (input quantity at start of the line), P0-Y
(output quantity at the start of the line)
P2-X (input quantity at the end of the line) and P2-Y (output
quantity at the end of the line).
Select the following characteristic line parameters using F2 to
F5:
P0-X
1 (for tap-change position 1)
P0-Y
0.2 (0.2 x 20 mA = 4 mA)
as a normalised value of the 20 mA output
value.
P2-X
17 (for tap-change position 17)
P2-Y
1 (1 x 20 mA = 20 mA)
as a normalised value of the 20 mA output
value.
Confirm all input information by pressing Enter!
y
P2-y (1)
P0-y (0.2)
P2
P0
1
P0-x
REG-DA operating manual
17
P2-x
x/tap-ch
211
REG-DA
Proceed to the next menu, ASETUP3, by pressing the right
arrow key.
Õ
This SETUP primarily defines how the analogue input should
behave if the range limits are exceeded.
The following options are available under “Limit Handling”:
None
High
Low
High+Low
Explanations:
212
None:
no limiting, neither up nor down
High:
Limiting, upwards only
Practical meaning:
In the selected example, the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring
would output 20 mA if the
transformer is in tap-change position 20.
Low:
Limiting, downwards only
Practical meaning:
In the selected example, the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring
will output 4 mA if the level has a
value smaller than 1
High + Low
Limits upwards and downwards
Practical meaning:
see above
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The built-in simulator can be used to check the settings (see
chapter 8).
Simulate a tap-change (see chapter 8.4 on Page 149).
Select SETUP 6, F1, F5 again. The ANALOGUE I/O [1-4] menu
will appear in the display.
If the left arrow key is pressed in this menu, the actual output
value of the analogue value will be displayed.
Assuming that tap-change position 17 has been simulated,
AnaR 3 delivers an output of 20 mA that can be checked using
a mA meter.
Pressing the left arrow key again displays the normalised value
of the output quantity.
If 20 mA hardware is being used, the normalised value
AnaN 1 = 1 if 20 mA is flowing, and AnaN 1 = 0.2 if only 4 mA
is flowing (level 1).
The parameterisation has now been completed.
Press the ESC key twice to return to the regulator, transducer,
recorder, etc. in the main menu.
REG-DA operating manual
213
REG-DA
12
Updating the Operating Software
A zero modem cable is required to update the operating
software. A hardware handshake is required due to the high
baud rate (link the RTS/CTS lines crosswise).
9-pole Sub-D socket
1 ---------2 ---------3 ---------4 ---------5 ---------6 ---------7 ---------8 ---------9 ---------Shield
214
9-pole Sub-D socket
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------- 4
---------- 3
---------- 2
---------- 1
---------- 5
---------- 6
---------- 8
---------- 7
---------- 9
Shield
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
12.1
Preparing the PC
12.1.1
Windows NT/2000/XP operating system
➪ Connect the cable to the selected PC COM interface.
➪ Connect the cable to the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring at the COM 1 interface.
12.2
Starting the bootstrap loader
The bootstrap loader must be started in the REG-DA Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring in order to update
the operating software. It is only possible to do this in the REGDA Status menu (“SETUP 6” / Status Menu).
press down for
approx. 3 s
➪ Use the “F3”
key to set the baud rate to exactly the
same value as that of your PC (115200 Baud).
➪ Downloading is carried out using the “update32.exe”
program on the PC.
➪ After starting “update32.exe”, select the interface and press
“OK” to confirm.
➪ Specify the PC interface in the “Configure / Baudrate” menu
to be 11520 baud.
REG-DA operating manual
215
REG-DA
Caution!
If a version of the bootstrap loader older than 1.07 (e.g.
1.06) is installed on your REG-DA, it must first be
updated to version 1.07. The current bootstrap loader is
available to be downloaded from our website (www.aeberle.de). Select the menu item “Update / new
bootstrap loader” to begin the bootstrap loader update.
The firmware can be updated after successfully
updating the bootstrap loader.
➪ The firmware update can be started by selecting the
“Update / update all” menu item.
Ensure that no old bootstrap loader version is located in the
firmware directory, or carry out the update of the firmware
and help texts individually.
Other items in the update menu:
216
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Firmware:
Update the firmware without the
help text.
Help text:
Update the help text.
REG-L Download:
Transfer
Background programs
from the PC to the REG-D/DA.
REG-L Upload:
Transfer and saving
of the background programs from
the PC to the REG-D.
Serves to protect the background
programs, since they during the
reading of the parameters with
WinREG not protected
Communication Card
Update:
Data transfer from the PC to the
instrumentation and control card
➪ In newer devices, the program automatically recognises
whether a REG-D/DA or a PAN-D is connected.
If recognition is not possible (this could be the case with
older devices), selection is carried out via a dialogue.
REG-DA operating manual
217
REG-DA
➪ Select the new firmware file.
➪ Select the new help file.
218
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
➪ Information about starting the download is then dispayed.
The further process runs automatically. A reset occurs after
completion of the download. A message appears to
indicate that the device is ready for use.
❑ If other messages appear, an error has occured and the
download must be repeated.
Note
If you have further questions, please send us an e-mail:
“info@a-eberle.de”
➪ Press “F4”
to exit the bootstrap loader.
➪ Press “F5”
to abort the data transfer
REG-DA operating manual
219
REG-DA
13
Maintenance and Current
Consumption
13.1
Cleaning information
The surface of the device can be cleaned witha dry cloth at any
time.
If the inside becomes dirty due to improper use, it is
recommended that you send the device back to the
manufacturer.
If a large amount of dust has accumulated on the terminal
blocks, the insulator coordination could fail.
Dust particles are generally hygroscopic and can bridge
creepage distances.
For this reason we recommend operating the device with the
doors closed. Furthermore, in dusty environments it is
particularly important to ensure that the cable connections are
correctly mounted.
220
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
13.2
Changíng fuses
Caution!
It is essential that the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring is disconnected from the
power supply before changing fuses!
Required fuse:
T2L 250 V, 2 A microfuse
A replacement fuse can be found in the plastic container at the
bottom of the housing.
Fuse
Replacement
fuse
13.3
Changing the battery
Caution!
Before changing the battery it is essential that the
REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring
is disconnected from the power supply!
Required battery:
Lithium 3 V with soldering tags
Type SANYO CR 14250 SE (3 V)
Service life:
in storage > 6 years
when in operation with a switch-on
duration > 50 %
> 10 years
We recommend having the battery changed in the factory.
REG-DA operating manual
221
REG-DA
If for certain reasons this is not possible, the following
precautionary measures should be carried out: all the
parameters should be saved using WinREG, the recorder
should be read out and the log book and the statistics unit
should be backed up.
Firstly the four fixing screws of the membrane keypad should be
undone using a cross-head screwdriver. Then carefully fold the
membrane keypad to the left.
Battery
The battery holder should then be removed and the connection
plug should be unplugged.
The new battery can now be inserted and the device can be
closed again. The steps listed above should then be carried out
in the reverse order.
222
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
13.4
REG-DA Current Consumption
Measuring circuit (100 V DC)
0 ... 150 V
300 mA
1 Ω / 1%
220µF
100 V
Sensor head
10:1
30
REG-DA
28
Measurement results
Power-up spike of 100 V DC
6
5
4
3V
=3A
3
2
Measured at
Peak
60 V DC
110 V DC
110 V AC
220 V DC
230 V AC
approx. 2 A
approx. 3 A
approx. 3 A
approx. 5 A
approx. 5 A
1
7 ms
The measured values provide information regarding the fuse
selection.
REG-DA operating manual
223
REG-DA
13.5
Replacing the device
If a REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
must be replaced, the device must first be disassembled.
If the device is defective, we recommend sending it to the
company headquarters together with a short description of the
fault.
An Allen key is provided so that the disassembly can be carried
out easily. It can be used to loosen the flange plate on the
bottom of the device.
After undoing the four screws, the flange plate can be shifted
approximately 5 mm to the left, so that the entire wiring
including the connector blocks can be removed through the
bottom of the device.
A replacement device can then replace the defective one and
can be put into operation within a few minutes.
224
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
14
Storage Information
The devices should be stored in clean, dry rooms. The devices
and their respective replacement modules can be stored
between -25 °C and +65 °C.
The relative humidity must not cause the formation of either
condensation or ice.
We recommend that the storage temperature remains within
the temperature range -10 °C to +55 °C to ensure that the builtin electrolytic capacitor does not age prematurely.
We also recommend that the device be connected to an
auxiliary voltage every two years to reform the electrolytic
capacitors. This procedure should also be carried out before
the device is put into operation. Under extreme climatic
conditions (tropics), this also simultaneously ensures “preheating” and helps to avoid the formation of condensation.
The device should be stored in the service room for at least two
hours prior to being connected to the voltage for the first time
so that it can become accustomed to the ambient temperature
there and to avoid the formation of moisture and condensation.
REG-DA operating manual
225
REG-DA
15
Background Information
15.1
Regulator mode
The command variable W and the actual value X of the network
voltage are continuously compared in the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring in order to maintain a
constant network voltage. The command variable W is either a
fixed value or a variable value which is the sum of fixed setpoint
values and the changeable voltage drop on the lines to the
consumers.
The difference between the actual value X and the control
variable W (the regulative deviation Xw) is calculated according
to a selected function in the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring and summed until a specified integral
value is reached. As soon as this integral value is reached, the
integrator is set to zero and a signal (correcting variable) is
simultaneously output which triggers the tap-changer (actuator)
of the transformer and thus changes its ratio. The integration
begins anew after each tap-change procedure.
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring functions as a three-tap change regulator with a
deadband.
No control commands are output if the actual value lies within
the deadband.
The parameters for the time behaviour of the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring can be optimally adapted to
the time behaviour of the network voltage (controlled system)
so that a high degree of control quality (high voltage constancy)
can be achieved with a low number of switching operations.
This results in a low load on the tap-changer.
All of the Relays can control several transformers operating in
parallel on one busbar without requiring further devices. The
transformers are regulated according to a specific algorithm,
e.g. so that the reactive part of the circulating current is
minimised. Thus transformers with different outputs and
different tap-change voltages can also be operated in parallel.
226
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
(X)
Voltage
regulation
Uactual
Uset
Xu=
f (Uactual, Uset)
(W)
Current
influence
Gradient
Limitation
Raise
Iactua
l
=
Xi = f (I)
Parallel
programs
(XW)
Integrator
=
Lower
Perm. Icr
e.g. Ib
Xp = f (...)
15.2
Command variable W
The command variable W for the voltage of the tap-changing
transformer may either be a fixed value (setpoint value) or a
variable value (setpoint value + a variable). A variable command
variable W can consist of, for example, the sum of a fixed
setpoint value and the share of the voltage drop on a line up to
a certain point in the circuit. This makes it possible to maintain
the voltage at a constant level even if the load and the primary
voltage are changing.
15.2.1
Fixed command variable
The command variable W is input into the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring as a voltage setpoint value
and remains constant. The Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring maintains the voltage at the
transformer within the tolerance band, independent of the
primary voltage and the corresponding load current (the voltage
drop on the line).
Adjusting the setpoint / Switching to a different setpoint value
Normally up to 4 setpoint values can be pre-selected. If the
present setpoint value is to be changed, this change can be
carried out on the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring either manually or by switching to another setpoint
value which has already been pre-selected. At the same time
the previous setpoint value becomes ineffective.
REG-DA operating manual
227
REG-DA
The change to another setpoint value can be activated either via
an external signal or by using a background program.
15.2.2
Variable command variable
The command variable W for regulating the voltage at a given
position on a line is the sum of a fixed setpoint value XR and the
variable value of a correction value XK.
W [V] = XR [V] + XK [V]
The correction value XK takes the data of the assigned line and
load into consideration (voltage drop Uf), so that the voltage at
the given position − the load point of the line − can be held
approximately constant.
It is assumed that the network is generally loaded
symmetrically, i.e. that the current in each line is approximately
the same. The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring can therefore be connected to the
current transformer of any line (L1, L2, L3).
Measuring the voltage drop Uf on the line
The voltage drop Uf on the line between the transformer and
the consumer is the difference between the r.m.s. values of
both voltages on the busbar and at the load point. The voltage
drop depends on the impedance of the line, the current
strength and the cos ϕ at the consumer.
The following formula defines the impedance of a line:
Z = RL + j ω L L + 1 / j ω C L
Measuring the voltage drop Uf as a function of the rated current
When the reactances of the line can be neglected and the cos
ϕ at the consumer remains constant, the voltage drop Uf can
be measured as a function of the nominal current.
Uf = f (I, R)
The gradient of the Uf/IL characteristic line required for the
correct measurement of Uf must be determined according to
228
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
the operating conditions. see "Nominal value of the gradient" on
page 232.
Control variables for Uf
If the cos ϕ at the consumer varies, it is possible to select the
active I cos ϕ or the reactive I sin ϕ component of the current
as the control variable for Uf rather than current intensity I itself.
The reactive component has either a positive or negative sign
to differentiate between an inductive or a capacitive load
respectively.
Measuring the voltage drop as a function of the current strength and
cos ϕ
(LDC = line drop compensation)
If the reactance of the line when measuring the voltage drop
cannot be neglected and the cos ϕ at the consumer is not
constant, the following formula applies to measuring Uf:
Uf = (R + j XL) ⋅ (I cos ϕ2 - j I sin ϕ2) = R I (cos ϕ2 - j sin ϕ2) + XL
I (sin ϕ2 + j cos ϕ2)
By inputting the values for R and XL, a replica of the line can be
created in the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring. This enables the voltage difference (of the r.m.s.
values) between the beginning of the line (transformer) and the
selected load point to be measured in relation to the current
intensity and the cos ϕ2. The value can then be used as the
correction value Xk. see "Variable command variable" on page
228.
Uf = U1 - U2
The angle at the load point is defined as ϕ2. However, in most
cases the difference between ϕ at the transformer and ϕ at the
load point may be neglected (see example).
The current and voltage paths (L1, L2, L3 as well as S1/k and
S2/l) must be correctly connected in order to be able to
measure the correct angle.
REG-DA operating manual
229
REG-DA
Example:
Given: R = 30 Ω; XL = 82 Ω; I = 100 A; cos ϕ2 = 0.7;
U2 = 110 kV at the end of the line.
When calculating using voltage pointers (for complex quantities
use the E-2.5.2 EXCEL program which can be downloaded
from our website, www.a-eberle.de), the result is the following
exact value Uf = U1 - U2 = 7.96 kV. (The angle difference of the
voltage pointer between the feeding point and the load point is
approximately 2°).
The voltage at the transformer must thus be regulated to the
r.m.s. value U1 = 110 kV + 7.96 kV = 117.96 kV (command
variable W).
Setting R and XL
The differences between the entered values and the actual
values of R and XL as well as the difference between the cos ϕ
at the transformer and at the consumer (the indicators of U1 and
U2 have different angles) can also be eliminated by readjusting
R and XL.
If values exist for the inductive and resistive voltage drop
between the feeding point and the load point, they can be
converted to resistances (R and X) using a simple mathematical
equation.
Divide the voltages by 10 and enter the resulting values as the
resistances R and X.
Example:
Ux = 12 V
Ur = 25 V
Thus:
X = 1.2 Ohms
R = 2.5 Ohms
230
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
15.2.3
Current-dependent setpoint value increment
Determining the voltage levels XR and Uf
The voltage level XR (setpoint value) should correspond to the
required voltage at a minimum current.
The voltage level Uf is a function of the gradient of the linear Uf/
IL-characteristic line. Adding this voltage to the entered setpoint
value XR (increasing the setpoint value) cancels out the voltage
drop on the line.
Various programs are available for incrementing the setpoint
value:
❑ setpoint value increment dependent on apparent current
❑ setpoint value increment dependent on active current
❑ setpoint value increment dependent on reactive current.
The line-drop compensation using the LDC process was
described in the previous chapter.
Apart from the LDC process, the most commonly used method
is compensation based on the apparent current and this is
described in more detail below.
Uf [V]
107.5 V
7.5 V
21.5 kV
6.563 V
4.688 V
100 V
20 kV
0
0
100 A
0.625 A
700 A 800 A
IL
4.375 A 5 A
Please observe that the positive or negative sign of the active
power is taken into consideration when the current-dependent
setpoint value is increased.
The current-dependent setpoint value increment is active if
power is being consumed and is inactive when power is being
supplied.
This procedure - which works in the interest of network
operation - can only be carried out properly and reliably when
the direction of the active power is input correctly.
REG-DA operating manual
231
REG-DA
In this case a positive sign for active power indicates incoming
power (setpoint value increment permissible), whereas a
negative sign indicates power supply, and the setpoint
increment function is disabled.
The connections for both the voltage and the current must be
correctly assigned in order to detect the direction of the active
power.
Therefore, please check the connections for current and
voltage, as well as the assignments (SETUP 5, F2) and lastly
check the sign for active power in the measurement transducer
mode.
Nominal value of the gradient
The nominal value of the gradient Gnom indicates the % change
in the nominal voltage when the current strength changes from
0 to 100% of the I1n nominal current of the current transformer
that is mounted in the network.
∆U [ V ]
G Nom [ % ] = ---------------------- ⋅ 100%
U Nom [ V ]
GNom = 100 V
(∆U in relation to ∆IL [A])
Thus for the voltage Uf = f (I)
G Nom [ % ]
I present [ A ]
Uf [ V ] = ∆U [ V ] = ------------------------ ⋅ U Nom [ V ] ⋅ ⎛⎝ ---------------------------⎞⎠
100%
I 1N [ A ]
Limitation of the voltage level Uf
To prevent the command variable from exceeding a certain limit
value in the event of overcurrent, the gradient of the linear Uf/IL
characteristic line must be set to zero from a specified value of
the current onwards. The characteristic line is horizontal after
this point.
232
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Measuring the required gradient
The two value pairs, voltage and current strength, must be
known at a light load as well as at full load to measure the
required nominal value Gnom [%].
Please note that the gradient and the setpoint value cannot be
set independently from each other for this type of characteristic
line, because when Gnom [%] > 0%, the command variable W,
which is already at the minimum current value Imin > 0, would be
unintentionally increased.
Example:
The voltage at a particular point in the network is to be held
constant at 20 kV under a variable load.
Nominal values of the voltage transformer:
U1n = 20 kV; U2n = 100 V; Knu = 200
Nominal values of the current transformer:
I1n = 800 A; I2n = 5 A; Kni = 160
Measured value pairs:
Values at
light load Pmin
Values at
full load Pmax
Current intensity I Imin = 100 A
Imax = 700 A
Control variable w wmin = 20.5 kV
wmax = 21.5 kV
Primary side:
The difference between the currents
∆I [A] = Imax - Imin = 700 A - 100 A = 600 A
Secondary side (primary values/Kni):
The difference between the currents
∆I [A] = Imax - Imin = 4.375 A - 0.625 A = 3.750 A
Absolute voltage change
∆U [V] = 21.5 kV - 20.5 kV = 1.0 kV
Voltage change in percent
∆U [%] = (1.0 kV / 20.0 kV) 100 % = 5 %
REG-DA operating manual
233
REG-DA
To raise the voltage of the transformer at full load (Imax) to
21.5 kV, the command variable must be ∆U = 1.0 kV, or 5% of
the nominal voltage U1n higher than the set setpoint value XR.
Calculating the nominal value of the gradient Gnom [%]
I 1N
∆U [ V ]
G Nom [ % ] = ---------------------- ⋅ 100 % ⋅ -------∆I
U Nom [ V ]
1.0 kV
A- = 6.67 %
G Nom [ % ] = ---------------- ⋅ 100 % ⋅ 800
-------------20 kV
600 A
Setpoint value reduction
With a light load and this gradient, the command variable W
would be increased to
I min G Nom
W = 1 + ⎛⎝ --------- ⋅ -------------- ⎞⎠ ⋅ U Nom
I 1n 100%
100 A 6.67%
W = 1 + ⎛⎝ --------------- ⋅ --------------- ⎞⎠ ⋅ 20.5 kV = 20.67 kV
800 A 100%
This corresponds to (100 A / 800 A) 6.67% = 0.83% of the
nominal voltage.
Thus, the setpoint value XR would have to be set lower by
0.83% in order to maintain the voltage level at 20.5 kV during a
light load.
Adjusting the setpoint values
At full load, the reduction of the setpoint value, however, causes
the command variable W to be lowered so that a compromise
must be found between the increase in Gnom [%] and the
decrease in the reduction of the setpoint value.
234
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Set the setpoint value and the gradient as follows
Voltage
Voltage
at full load
at light load
Too high
Correct
Setpoint no change,
lower the gradient
Too low
Correct
Setpoint no change,
increase the gradient
Setpoint value
setting
Setpoint value
setting
Action
at full load
at light load
Correct
Too high
reduce setpoint
value
increase the gradient
Correct
Too low
increase the setpoint
value
lower the gradient
15.3
Action
Summary and Examples
for Current Influencing
Parameters
Gradient:
Specifies the setpoint value increment compared to 100 V with
nominal current.
e.g. Gradient, Grad., = 5 %:
When the nominal current is reached, the voltage is
increased by 5 % of 100 V. The nominal current can be
1/5 A. In this case, when the nominal current is reached the
setpoint value increases by 5 V.
Limitation:
Max. setpoint value increment in % compared to 100 V.
e.g. Limitation, Lim., = 4%:
Max. voltage increment of 4 % compared to 100 V is 4 V.
REG-DA operating manual
235
REG-DA
No further increase takes place once the 4 V limit is
reached.
The tolerance band remains unchanged. The permissible
regulative deviation is not affect by the voltage increase.
The setpoint value, corrected to include the voltage increase, is
not shown. However, it is indicated by the black colour of the
arrow in the bar graph display.
Current-dependent voltage increase
The currently-active setpoint value Uset,corr. is calculated as
follows:
I
In
Grad
xd
∆ U = --------------- × 100 V × ------
U set, corr = U set + ∆ U
100 %
If ∆U > ∆B, then ∆U is limited to the size of ∆B.
Setpoint value [V]
107
106
Upper
tolerance band
105
Setpoint
104
103
Lower
tolerance band
102
101
Gradient = 5 %
Limitation = 4 %
100
Setpoint value = 100 V = 100 %
99
Permissible regulative deviation = 1 %
98
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
Current normalised to 1/5 A.
0.8
1
Current-influencing programs
Apparent current: Ixd = I
The apparent current is used to determine the voltage increase.
Increases only take place when the active power is positive.
236
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
This method can be used to compensate the voltage drop if
cosϕ is relatively constant.
Active current: Isd = Iw = I x cosϕ (with +/- sign)
The active current is used to determine the change in the
setpoint value. If a negative active current flows (energy fed
back), the setpoint value is decreased. The limitation is
symmetrical and applies to both increases and decreases.
Reactive current: Ixd = Ib = I x sinϕ (with +/- sign)
The reactive current is used to determine the voltage increase.
The increase/decrease is independent of the sign of the active
power. It is increased if the reactive current is inductive, and
decreased if it is capacitive.
This program is primarily used if the cosϕ of the network varies
by a large amount.
LDC (Line Drop Compensation):
Used to compensate the voltage drop on a line when the active
and reactive resistances are known. This process can also be
used if the cosϕ of the consumer is not constant. The gradient
is not required for this process. The limitation, however,
continues to apply.
Abbreviations
Current used to determine the voltage increase [A]
Ixd:
I:
Apparent current, measurement quantity [A]
Iw:
Active current [A]
Ib:
Reactive current [A]
In:
Nominal current of the current transformer 1/5 A [A]
Grad.:
Gradient [%]
Lim.:
Limitation [L]
∆B:
Limitation of the voltage increase [V]
∆U:
Increase in setpoint value [V]
Uset:
Specified setpoint value [V]
Uset,corr the setpoint value corrected to include the voltage
increase [V]
REG-DA operating manual
237
REG-DA
15.4
Regulative deviations
15.4.1
Regulative deviation Xw
The regulative deviation Xw is the difference between the actual
value X of the regulating variable and the command variable W.
The sign of the regulative deviation can be plus or minus.
Note
The regulative deviation Xw corresponds to the negative
regulation difference Xd.
[ % ] ⋅ W [ V -]
Xw [ V ] = X [ V ] – W [ V ] = Xw
----------------------------------100 %
Xw [ V ]
Xw [ % ] = ---------------- ⋅ 100 %
W[V]
15.4.2
Permissible regulative deviation Xwz
To minimise the number of switches of the tap-changer, a
deviation in the network voltage from the command variable W
is tolerated within certain limits, i.e. a specific regulative
deviation is permissible.
This permissible regulative deviation Xwz is entered as a ± n%
of the control variable W (independent of all the other limit values
expressed in %) and sets the limits for the maximum
permissible relative fluctuation of the network voltage above
and below the control value W. For this reason the absolute limit
values of the tolerance band are dependent on the set
command variable W.
When the network voltage dips into this tolerance band, the
regulation procedure is interrupted and the integrator is set to
zero so that the regulation/integration process only begins
again when the network voltage overshoots or undershoots the
limits of the tolerance band.
Fluctuations in the network voltage within the permissible
regulative deviation have no effect on the regulation procedure.
238
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
15.4.3
Displaying the regulative deviation Xw
The deviation of the network voltage X from the command
variable W is indicated analogously on the scale of the
regulator. The colour of the pointer changes from light to dark
when the voltage exceeds the permissible regulative deviation
Xwz.
When indicating the permissible regulative deviation Xwz, the
setpoint value correction Xk for compensating the voltage drop
in the line is not taken into consideration.
15.4.4
Setting the permissible regulative deviation Xwz
The tolerance band determined by the permissible regulative
deviation Xwz (± n% of the control variable W) must be higher than
the tap-change of the transformer in percent, because
otherwise the changed output voltage of the transformer would
violate the opposite limit of the permissible regulative deviation
after a control command has been executed. Furthermore,
after having reached the integral value, a control command
would be output to reset the previous transformer tap-changer
position. This procedure would be constantly repeated, i.e. this
would lead to frequent tap-changes of the transformer and thus
to unwanted fluctuations in the network voltage.
In order to have sufficient distance from the upper and lower
limits of the permissible regulative deviation, the following
formula applies
2 ⋅ |± Xwz [%]| > ∆UTap [%]
or
|± Xwz [%]| > 0.5 ∆UTap [%]
Guide value for Xwz
The following guide value is generally recommended for the
permissible regulative deviation Xwz:
|± Xwz [%]| ≥ 0.6 ∆UTap [%]
REG-DA operating manual
239
REG-DA
Example for determining the permissible regulative deviation
Nominal voltage
UNom = 100 kV
Number of levels
± 15
Setting range
85 kV ... 115 kV
Tap-change increment:
(115 kV - 85 kV): 30 levels =
1 kV / tap-change
Thus 1 kV corresponds to the value of 1% of Unom
With this data, the permissible regulative deviation Xwz should
not be less than the value Xwz = ± 0.6 ⋅ 1.0 kV = ± 0.6 kV (±
0.6%) The absolute limits are thus 100.6 kV and 99.4 kV.
If, for example, the upper limit is exceeded and the voltage is set
back by one tap-change, the voltage is reduced to 100.6kV –
1.0 kV = 99.6 kV, i.e. the lower limit of 99.4 kV is not undershot.
The voltage remains within the range of the permissible
regulative deviation.
240
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
15.5
Monitoring extreme operating values
(faults)
If a fault occurs in the network, e.g. inadmissibly or extremely
high/low voltages or currents, the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring must not switch the transformer tapchanger to the highest or lowest tap-changer position. This
occurs to prevent the network voltage having an impermissible
value after the cause of the fault has been eliminated. These
monitoring tasks are carried out by additional limit signals.
15.5.1
Limit signal
Switching time delay
The difference in time between when the limit value is reached
and when the signal is transmitted is defined as the time delay.
A specific time delay can be selected (parameterised) for each
limit signal.
Note
Please note that the actual switching time delay can
exceed the parameterised switching time delay by up to
2 seconds. This difference is due to the procedure
selected for determining the measurement values.
Switching hysteresis, switching difference Xsd
The difference in the input values between the switching on and
off of the limit signal after the limit value violation has
disappeared is defined as the switching difference. The
hysteresis Xsd has a standard value of 1% of 100 V
(corresponds to 1 V).
Assignment of the limit signal
Each of the following limit values is monitored by one limit
signal. A special additional function is activated for certain types
of limit signals.
In the menu you have the option of selecting whether a binary
output or LED should be activated if a limit value violation
occurs.
REG-DA operating manual
241
REG-DA
Note
Any number of additional limit signals can be generated
via the REG-L programming language (as a background
program).
Setting the limit values/plausibility check
The limit signal can be set freely for each limit signal within a
given range. Therefore the user must check the logical relations
of the values with each other.
Limit signal trigger (G1)
When U > G1: Activation of the INHIBIT LOW regulator function
(no control commands are output) in the event of undervoltage.
Setting range: 100 V ≤ G1 ≤ 150 V
Note
The tripping can only be entered as an absolute value,
because there is also only one voltage that may not be
exceeded under any circumstances, regardless of the
selected setpoint value.
The limit signal can be allocated to a binary output (R3 ... R11)
if required. Furthermore, the limit value violation can be
signalled by a freely programmable LED (LED1 ... LED12).
Backwards high-speed switching limit signal (G2)
When U > G2: Activation of the BACKWARDS HIGH-SPEED
SWITCHING function (for more information on the fastest series
of control commands, see "High-speed switching add-on" on
page 246).
Setting range: 1.00 X0 ≤ G2 ≤ 1.35 X0 (0% ... +35%)
The limit value is normally given as a %.
X0 represents the reference value (setpoint).
No more control commands will be output after the dip into the
tolerance band ± Xwz.
The limit signal can be allocated to a binary output (R3 ... R11)
if required. Furthermore, the limit value violation can be
signalled by a freely programmable LED (LED1 ... LED12).
242
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Forward high-speed switching limit signal (G3)
When U < G3: Activation of the FORWARDS HIGH-SPEED
SWITCHING function (for more information on the fastest series
of control commands, see "High-speed switching add-on" on
page 246).
This function is not available if the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring is operated in the “Creeping Net
Breakdown” mode.
Reason: If the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring changes to high-speed switching when the
“creeping net breakdown” function is switched on, the
conditions may be fulfilled (depending on parameterisation)
under which the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring detects a creeping net breakdown and changes to
blocking without the voltage having reached the permissible
tolerance band.
Setting range: 0.65 X0 ≤ G3 ≤ 1.00 X0 (-35% ... 0%)
The limit value is normally given as a %.
X0 represents the reference value (setpoint).
The limit signal can be allocated to a binary output (R3 ... R11)
if required. Furthermore, the limit value violation can be
signalled by a freely programmable LED (LED1 ... LED12).
Limit value transmitter > U (G4)
The overvoltage >U is a limit value which only influences the
regulation in special operating circumstances.
If the voltage exceeds the >U limit then all “raise” commands
are surpressed.
The limit value particularly influences the regulation if operating
with several setpoints and using an absolute value (100 V / 110
V) as the limit value for >U.
Setting range: 0 ... +25% *
Further information: see "> U Overvoltage" on page 118
The limit signal can be allocated to a binary output (R3 ... R11)
if required. Furthermore, the limit value violation can be
signalled by a freely programmable LED (LED1 ... LED12).
REG-DA operating manual
243
REG-DA
Limit-value transmitter >I (G5)
I > G5: Activation of the STANDSTILL regulator function if
undercurrent occurs (no issuing of control commands).
However, the STANDSTILL function will only be activated if it
has been previously activated in the menu “Add-On 5”.
The selected rated value (1 A or 5 A) always applies as the limit
value reference X0.
Setting range: 1.00 X0 ≤ G5 ≤ 2.10 X0 (0% ... 210%)
The limit signal can be allocated to a binary output (R3 ... R11)
if required. Furthermore, the limit value violation can be
signalled by a freely programmable LED (LED1 ... LED12).
Limit value transmitter < U (G6)
The undervoltage <U is a limit value which only influences the
regulation in special operating circumstances.
If the voltage falls below the <U limit, all “lower” commands are
surpressed.
The limit value particularly influences the regulation if operating
with several setpoints and using an absolute value (100 V / 110
V) as the limit value for <U.
Setting range: -25% ... 0% *
Further information: see "< U Undervoltage" on page 117
The limit signal can be allocated to a binary output (R3 ... R11)
if required. Furthermore, the limit value violation can be
signalled by a freely programmable LED (LED1 ... LED12).
Note
The <U message is suppressed for voltages < 20 V for
firmware version 2.00 onwards.
Limit-value transmitter <I (G7)
I < G7: Activation of the STANDSTILL regulator function in the
event of undercurrent (no issuing of control commands).
However, the STANDSTILL function will only be activated if it
has been previously activated in the menu “Add-On 5”.
Setting range: 0.0 X0 ≤ G7 ≤ 1.00 X0
The selected rated value (1 A or 5 A) always applies as the limit
value reference X0 (also refer to Add-On 5, F2).
244
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The limit signal can be allocated to a binary output (R3 ... R11)
if required. Furthermore, the limit value violation can be
signalled by a freely programmable LED (LED1 ... LED12).
Note
The <I message is suppressed for voltages < 20 V for
firmware version 2.00 onwards.
Inhibit low limit value transmitter (G8)
When U < G8: Activation of the limit signal and of the
STANDSTILL regulator function (no issuing of control
commands see "Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring inhibit low function" on page 247).
Setting range: 0.25 X0 ≤ G8 ≤ 1.00 X0 (-75% ... +0%)
The limit value is normally given as a %.
X0 represents the reference value.
You can chose 100 V or 110 V as the reference value for the
setpoint (also refer to Add-On 5, F2).
The limit signal can be allocated to a binary output (R3 ... R11)
if required. Furthermore, the limit value violation can be
signalled by a freely programmable LED (LED1 ... LED12).
Reference value X0 and reference value for the limit values
The upper and lower limit value may be set as a relative value in
% of the current setpoint value or as an absolute value in
relation to the nominal value of the voltage Unom see "Factory
Settings of the Parameters" on page 303.
Example for relative limits:
If the “Setpoint value X” is selected as the reference value, all of
the limit values change in relation to the respective entered
setpoint value.
Setpoint value: X = 102.0 V; limit values: ± 10%;
thus the upper limit is 112.2 V and the lower limit is 91.8 V.
Example for absolute limits:
If “Unom= 100 V” is selected as the reference value, all of the limit
values refer to the nominal voltage of 100 V and are
independent of the current setpoint value.
REG-DA operating manual
245
REG-DA
Reference value: Unom = 100 V, Setpoint: 105 V, limit values: ±
10% of Unom; thus the lower limit is 90 V and the upper limit is
110 V.
15.6
Add-Ons
15.6.1
High-speed switching add-on
Using the high-speed switching add-on switches off the
reaction delay (regulation behaviour, see Page 252), i.e. the
control commands for the tap-changer are output in the
shortest possible time sequence.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring quickly
regulates the tap-changer via successive control commands in
the same direction (RAISE or LOWER) back to a tap-changer
position with which the voltage of the transformer is within the
permissible regulative deviation.
The high-speed switching then becomes inactive again.
This ensures that transformer output voltages that are too high
or too low are quickly rectified.
The user can set the shortest time between control commands
(the tap-changer in operation time) according to the time
requirement of a tap-change operation
(SETUP 5, F1, F2) so that only command change operations
that can be carried out are given.
There are two different types of control to avoid the tapchanger drives being triggered by a sequence of control
commands that is too fast.
➪ If a Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
input E1 ... E16 is configured as the tap-changer in
operation input (with the exception of E5 and E6), the Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will not output
the control commands until 2 s after the tap-changer in
operation “drops”.
➪ If the tap-changer in operation is not output to the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring, the relay will
output the control commands with a time separation
corresponding to the set “maximum time tap-changer in
operation” (SETUP 5 - Add-On 1).
246
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Activation
The high-speed switching of the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring is activated either internally or externally
via a binary signal. A binary input signal can also be used to
activate the high-speed switching operation even if the actual
voltage value is not sufficient to require it.
15.6.2
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
inhibit low function
The output of control commands to the tap-changer is blocked
in inhibit low (standstill) mode (the output is “set to a standstill”).
The standstill is active until the network voltage no longer
violates the limit value for the standstill. The Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring will continue to function again
normally approximately 5 s after the network voltage violation
has ended.
Activation
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
switched to inhibit low either internally (standard program) or
externally via a binary signal.
REG-DA operating manual
247
REG-DA
Summary of all limit values
G1
Tripping
G2
Backward highspeed switching
G4
>U
setpoint
value
Permissible
regulative deviation
G6
G3
<U
Forward highspeed switching
Undervoltage
inhibit low
G8
Tap-changes
Raise
Lower
15.6.3
Measuring the “Creeping Net Breakdown”
The “Creeping Net Breakdown” add-on is mainly used if the
voltage on the high voltage side has fallen for a certain period
of time.
A Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring generally
initially reacts with tap-changes in the direction of a higher
voltage in such cases to maintain a constant secondary
voltage.
If the voltage on the primary side suddenly returns to its default
value, the transformer will be set to a tap that is too high (high
voltage) and will have to be regulated back in the direction of a
lower voltage.
In certain circumstances, this behaviour can cause the voltage
to exceed the trigger threshold of protection devices or the
“tripping” limit of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring to be reached which blocks the relay.
The “creeping net breakdown” function is used to prevent such
situations.
Only Relays that are equipped with two voltage transformers
(M3 or M9) can use this feature.
248
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The “creeping net beakdown” function can only be derived from
the overvoltage.
If only the control voltage (undervoltage) is available to the Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring, it is not possible
to ascertain whether the voltage dip is caused by a load or
whether the reduction of the voltage is caused by a dangerous
situation on the high voltage side.
If the regulative deviation is so large that - during a certain time
period - more than a specified number of control commands in
the RAISE direction is required to eliminate the regulative
deviation, the REG-DA can react in two different ways:
➪ The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
does not output any further control commands. It leaves the
“AUTOMATIC” operating mode and remains in the
“MANUAL” operating mode until it is switched back into
“AUTOMATIC” mode, either via the manual key or via a
remote control command.
➪ The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
blocks all further control commands for a lock time (1 min ...
20 min). This lock is automatically removed if:
a) the specified lock time has expired
or
b) when the first LOWER control
command is output (i.e. when the upper limit of the
regulative deviation is violated.
The “creeping net breakdown” function is canceled if the
measurement quantity returns to being within the permissible
range or if a lower command is issued.
The “Creeping Net Breakdown” function suppresses the “HighSpeed Forward Switching” function.
REG-DA operating manual
249
REG-DA
15.6.4
“Maximum tap-change difference” monitoring AddOn
A tap-change difference can only occur when at least two
transformers are considered.
If parallel programs that use the circulating reactive current
process are used, then the transformers are always regulated
to different tap-change positions if the transformers that are
working in parallel are different (uk, number of tap-change
positions, etc.).
The “maximum tap-change difference” parameter can be used
to limit the difference.
If the specified tap-change difference is reached, the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will no longer carry
out tap-change operations if doing so would cause the
circulating reactive current to reduce further.
The ParErr error flag is used for the monitoring.
ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel
error) and automatically switches a group of transformers
operating in parallel from the Automatic operating mode to the
Manual operating mode.
ParrErr is triggered when a tap difference occurs between two
transformers operating in parallel which is larger than the
specified “maximum tap-change difference”.
An alternative procedure can be specified if this behaviour is not
desired. Otherwise only the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring that carried out the tap-change that
lead to the permissible maximum tap difference being exceed
will be switched over to the manual operating mode.
Note
If you prefer this behaviour, please contact our company
headquarters.
15.6.5
Add-On: monitoring the tap-changer
After the control command has been output, the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring controls the correct
switching of the tap-changer so that the tap-change signal (tapchanger in operation) that is returned by the tap-changer is
measured and compared with the value of the maximum tap-
250
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
change in operation time which was previously set via the menu
(Setup 5, add-on 1).
If the tap-change signal continues to be output for a longer
period of time, it is possible that the tap-changer has an error.
The operation of the tap-changer can be interrupted using one
of the freely programmable outputs R3 ... R11.
In this case the Laufl-F. or the Laufl-F+ function must be
selected.
Laufl-F. causes a continuous signal at the selected output relay.
Laufl-F+ only causes a wiping signal.
This output signal can be used to switch off the motor drive of
the tap-changer (for example).
REG-DA operating manual
251
REG-DA
15.7
Time behaviour of the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring when a
control command is output
Requirements
Optimal regulation behaviour is achieved when the operating
requirements with regard to the voltage constancy need as few
tap-changer operations as possible.
However, optimal regulation behaviour also requires that larger
regulative deviations are regulated quicker than smaller
regulative deviations.
Note
For more information about understanding the
regulation behaviour see "Integrated time program" on
page 259!
Moreover, large regulative deviations should be rectified faster
than small regulative deviations.
There are two measures for complying with the requirements
specified above:
➪ The regulative deviations are summed up to a specified
integral value before the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring outputs a control command.
If the network voltage dips into the tolerance band (± Xwz)
before this integral value is reached, the integrator will be
set to zero.
➪ The regulative deviations are continuously evaluated before
the integration according to the selected time relationship
(∆U · t = const, REG-5A). Depending on the time interval,
the evaluation factor increases either linearly or non-linearly
with the value of the regulative deviation. Therefore, large
regulative deviations (voltage deviations) are rectified faster
than small ones. Large deviations in the voltage from the
command variable trigger a control command after a short
period of time (the integral value is reached quickly),
whereas small voltage deviations take longer to trigger a
control command.
252
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Basic time and time factor
The evaluation factor variable of the regulative deviation Xw is
not indicated directly, rather it is indicated as the time tg in
seconds which passes from the beginning of the integration to
the triggering of a control command provided that the regulative
deviation is constant. Thus, the relationship between the
regulative deviation and the reaction time can be recognised
immediately.
If, for operational reasons, a slower reaction of the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is desired, the time tg
may be increased by multiplying it with the time factor FZ
(0,1 ... 30).
The time interval that elapses between the signalling of a control
command and the actual triggering of a control command is in
part determined by the switching time delay.
tv = tb · Ft
Time behaviour of the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring
The switching delay tv for a set permissible regulative deviation
Xwz is thus dependent on the value of the present regulative
deviation Xw, the selected characteristic line Xw/tg and the
value of the set time factor Ft.
REG-DA operating manual
253
REG-DA
Reaction time tv
3%
3%
2%
2%
Deadband
setpoint value
Permissible regulative deviation
Present negative
regulative deviation
Permissible regulative deviation
1%
1%
Present positive
regulative deviation
Since the permissible regulative deviation applies for both
positive as well as for negative regulative deviations, only the
positive side of the regulative deviation is usually depicted.
254
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
15.7.1
Determining the reaction delay tv
Hyperbolic characteristic curve Xw/tg (setting the time behaviour:
∆U*t=const)
Reaction time tg [sec]
30
25
Set permissible
regulative deviation
20
15
10
5
0
0
1
2
3
4
Present regulative deviation ∆UW [%]
5
6
7
8
9
10
Time factor = 1
Set regulative deviation = 1%
Constant present regulative deviation = 2%
➪ Time until tap-change: 15 s
Note
Please note that the actual switching time delay can
exceed the parameterised switching time delay by up to
2 seconds. This difference is due to the procedure
selected for determining the measurement values.
REG-DA operating manual
255
REG-DA
A black bar increases from left to right at the bottom of the
quasi-analogue display in regulator mode. This bar shows how
long it will take until the next control command is issued.
The command is issued when the bar reaches the right hand
edge of the display.
Progress bar
Exception: if the bar reaches the edge after 5 seconds whilst a
tap-change is being carried out, the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring waits for this process to be completed
before a new tap-change operation is started.
Hyperbolic characteristic curve Xw/tg (setting the time behaviour: REG5A/E)
Reaction time tg [sec]
30
25
Set permissible
regulative deviation
20
15
10
5
0
0
1
2
3
4
Present regulative deviation ∆UW [%]
5
6
7
8
9
10
Time factor = 1
Set regulative deviation = 1%
Constant present regulative deviation = 2%
➪ Time until tap-change: 10 s
Note
Please note that the actual switching time delay can
exceed the parameterised switching time delay by up to
2 seconds. This difference is due to the procedure
selected for determining the measurement values.
256
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Further examples:
The permissible regulative deviation is set to Xwz = ± 2%, the
time factor is set to 5. From the set of curves, the curve for Xwz
= ± 2% has been selected. Using the curve, one obtains the
following values:
Xw [%] = [(X - W)/W] 100%
2%
3%
4%
5%
10%
Basic time tg (s) from the curve
30 s
16 s
10 s
7s
2s
Switching delay
= basic time ⋅ time factor
5 ⋅ 30 s
= 150 s
5 ⋅ 16 s
= 80 s
5 ⋅ 10 s
= 50 s
5⋅7s
= 35 s
5⋅2s
= 10 s
How to proceed:
Determine the point of intersection of the Y-coordinate at Xw
with the curve of the permissible regulative deviation set on the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring. The value
of the Y-coordinate corresponds to the basic time (see
graphic).
A black bar increases from left to right at the bottom of the
quasi-analogue display in regulator mode. This bar shows how
long it will take until the next control command is issued..
The command is issued when the bar reaches the right hand
edge of the display.
Exception: if the bar reaches the edge after 5 seconds whilst a
tap-change is being carried out, the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring waits for this process to be completed
before a new tap-change operation is started.
REG-DA operating manual
Progress bar
257
REG-DA
Linear characteristic line Xw/tg (setting the time behaviour: linear)
Reaction time tg [sec]
30
Set permissible
regulative deviation
25
20
15
10
5
0
0
1
2
3
4
Present regulative deviation ∆UW [%]
5
6
7
8
9
10
Set regulative deviation = 2%
Constant present regulative deviation = 4%
➪ Time until tap-change: 24 s
Note
Please note that the actual switching time delay can
exceed the parameterised switching time delay by up to
2 seconds. This difference is due to the procedure
selected for determining the measurement values.
A black bar increases from left to right at the bottom of the
quasi-analogue display in regulator mode. This bar shows how
long it will take until the next control command is issued..
The command is issued when the bar reaches the right hand
edge of the display.
Progress bar
258
Exception: if the bar reaches the edge after 5 seconds whilst a
tap-change is being carried out, the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring waits for this process to be completed
before a new tap-change operation is started.
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
15.7.2
Integrated time program
Both the “∆U · t = const” and “REG- 5A/E” integrating time
programs function in the following manner: after the integral of
the voltage deviation ∆U and the time “t” has reached a
specified value, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring carries out a tap-change operation. The integrator is
reset to zero after each tap-change operation.
If the voltage leaves the voltage band directly after a regulation
procedure, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring waits for the time specified in the algorithm (time
from the characteristic curve multiplied with the time factor)
before it initiates another control procedure.
Considering a bucket that is asymmetrically hung is helpful for
understanding the two integrating procedures.
Picture 1
Memory is filled with a
small regulative deviation
Picture 2
Memory is filled with a
large regulative deviation
The bucket tips when it is filled and this is analogous to a stepchange operation carried out by the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring.
The analogy can be interpreted as follows:
The greater the amount of water that flows into the bucket per
unit time (the larger the voltage deviation), the quicker the
bucket will fill up and tip over (the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring carries out a tap-change).
The smaller the amount of water that flows into the pail per unit
of time (the smaller the voltage deviation), the longer it takes for
the bucket to fill up and tip over (the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring carries out a tap-change).
REG-DA operating manual
259
REG-DA
The volume of water flowing (e.g. m3/unit time) corresponds to
the voltage deviation.
This algorithm is based on the operating experience that small
regulative deviations do not need to be rectified immediately,
since in general they do not lead to a fault in the operation and
also they can often “heal” themselves due to changes to the
load (voltage returns to being within the bandwidth again).
The setpoint value and bandwidth boundaries are generally
parameterised such that the voltage lies in the middle of the
tolerance band.
In situations in which the voltage has changed such that it still
lies within the band but close to the limit due to a particular load
situation or a change to the primary voltage, small changes in
the voltage or the load will always lead to a band violation.
However, since small regulative deviations are accompanied by
a long integration or reaction time (it takes a long time for the
bucket to fill), the voltage spends a large part of a particular
amount of time outside the permissible band.
In such cases, specific intervention of the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring is desired.
15.7.3
Trend memory
The “Trend memory” parameter can be used to accelerate all
the algorithms.
It functions as follows:
If the voltage leaves the tolerance band, the integration process
is initiated − the bucket is filled. The Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring performs a tap-change operation after
a certain time has elapsed, which is determined by various
parameters (the entered permissible regulative deviation, the
actual regulative deviation, time factor).
If the voltage returns to the bandwidth without the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring having issued a tapchange command, the integrator is only reset to zero after the
time that is parameterised for the trend memory has elapsed
and not immediately.
However, if the voltage leaves the tolerance band again a short
time later, the tap-change command will tend to be issued
earlier because the integrator was not “emptied” and so will
become full quicker.
260
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
However, once a tap-changing command is issued, the
memory is set back to zero.
Therefore by using the “trend memory” parameter it can be
achieved that the integrator is not immediately reset to zero if
the voltage returns to being within the permissible tolerance
band. If the voltage leaves the bandwidth at a point in time at
which the memory has not been completely emptied, the Relay
for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring can react earlier,
since the integration procedure or “filling” procedure doesn’t
start from zero, but rather at a higher level.
Note
The function of the trend memory is explained using an
example at the end of this section.
In general: The time, which is derived from the selected time
program, is crucial to the memory loading process which
triggers a tap-change operation when the memory is 100% full.
However, the emptying of the memory is dependent on the time
that is specified as the trend memory time.
Note
For the delta U * t = const and
REG 5A/E time programs, the time to be entered for
loading of the memory can be derived from the
appropriate curves. For the “Const” time program use
time T1 (see Page 262).
A progress bar is incorporated in the regulator screen so that
the present trend memory level can be judged by the user.
The progress bar is displayed as a black bar at the bottom of
the screen. The bar is black when the memory is filling (i.e. the
voltage lies outside of the tolerance band), and when it is
emptying it changes colour and is light.
A tap-change operation is carried out when the bar reaches the
right hand side of the screen. If the bar is invisible, this means
that the trend memory has been completely emptied.
Rrogress bar
REG-DA operating manual
261
REG-DA
15.7.4
“Const” time program
“Const” stands for constant reaction times, which cannot be
adjusted in a sensitive manner to the respective regulative
deviations, as is the case for the “∆U · t = const” or the “REG5A/E” procedures.
Two differing times are specified in the “Const” program, which
cause the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
to perform a tap-change operation dependent on the extent of
the regulative deviation.
Time T1 is effective if the voltage has a value that lies outside of
the voltage band, but which can be brought back within the
band with a single tap-change operation. T2 is valid when larger
deviations have to be rectified.
The limit above which T2 is valid is therefore the same as the
specified permissible regulative deviation.
Example:
Permissible regulative deviation is 2%
Actual regulative deviation is 3%
➪ The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
uses the time T1
Permissible regulative deviation is 2%
Actual regulative deviation is 5%
➪ The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
uses the time T2
U
5%
4%
3%
2%
T2
T2
T1
setpoint value
One advantage of this procedure is that in the case of regulative
deviations which are larger than one tap-change, the operator
262
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
can easily see when the next tap-change command will be
issued.
A disadvantage compared to the other procedures is that over
a long period of time the number of tap-changes will probably
be larger than would be the case for the “∆U · t = const.” and
“REG 5A/E” regulation algortihms.
As a general settings recommendation, the time T2 should be
shorter than time T1 since large regulative deviations should be
rectified more quickly than small ones.
Of course, the absolute values of the times in this case also
depend on the specific conditions at the respective feeding
point (load structure and behaviour etc.).
Sensible values for the trend memory can also only be derived
from practical experience.
REG-DA operating manual
263
REG-DA
The “Const” time program and the way the trend memory
operates should be explained using an example.
Parameters:
Time program:
Const
T1:
40 seconds
Trend memory:
40 seconds
Permissible regulative deviation:± 1%
T 1 = 4 0 s
+ 1 %
S e tp o in t v a lu e
T 0
-1 %
In te g r a to r T 1
1
0
0
0
0
(w ith
tre n d
m e m o ry )
s
p e r m is s ib le r e g u la tiv e
d e v ia tio n
,0
t
ta p c h a n g e
,8
,6
,4
t
,2
s
1 0
i
2 0
3 0
4 0
ii
iii
T a p c h a n g e
R a is e
s
L o w e r
0
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
t
!
6 0
In te g r a to r T 1
(w ith o u t
tre n d
m e m o ry )
1 ,0
ta p c h a n g e
0 ,8
0 ,6
0 ,4
t
0 ,2
s
T 0
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
"
7 0
T a p c h a n g e
R a is e
L o w e r
0
s
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
t
7 0
#
Diagrams 1 to 5
The entire situation is illustrated in five diagrams.
Diagram 1 shows the progression of the voltage with time.
The voltage leaves the tolerance band at time T0 and returns
again 20 seconds later.
264
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
After a further 10 seconds, the voltage leaves the permissible
tolerance band again, and after 30 seconds a “lower” tapchange is issued by the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring which returns the value to within the band.
Diagram 2 shows how full the trend memory is (fill level). The
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring performs a
tap-change if the fill level reaches the normalised value “1”. If,
on the other hand, the graph reaches the x-axis (0 value), the
memory is completely emptied.
Diagram 3 shows when the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring issues a control command due to
voltage deviations.
Diagrams 4 and 5 show the behaviour that occurs without the
trend memory.
After 20 seconds the integrator for T1 is reset to zero, and after
30 seconds it begins to fill again − starting from zero.
A further 40 seconds (T1) are required to fill the memory to a
level where a tap-change command is issued.
The way the trend memory operates can be best illustrated
using diagram 2.
In order to explain the individual steps more clearly, the diagram
has been divided into three sections, i, ii and iii.
Section i: The voltage is outside the voltage band, the integrator
for time T1 is running.
If the voltage were to remain outside the tolerance band for 40
seconds, the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring would issue a control command. However, since
the voltage returns to being within the tolerance band after 20
seconds, the regulation procedure is surpressed.
Section ii: The integrator for time T1 is half full (50% or 20
seconds in total). Emptying now begins according to the time
that has been entered for the trend memory (100% = > 40
seconds).
REG-DA operating manual
265
REG-DA
Section iii: The voltage only remains inside the permissible
tolerance band for 10 seconds and then exceeds the allowed
voltage range again.
During this time the integrator could only be reduced from 50%
to 25% full (20 seconds to 10 seconds). If the voltage now
remains outside the band for a further 30 seconds the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring will issue a tapchange command.
For the voltage progression described in the example the time
before the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
intervenes is reduced from 70 seconds to 60 seconds by
employing the trend memory (refer also to diagrams 4 and 5).
15.7.5
Setting the time factor Ft
The time factor Ft can only be set by the ∆U · t = const, REG
5A/E and LINEAR time behaviours.
For a normal 24 hour load curve, an empirical value between 2
and 3 is suitable for the time factor. 3. If the 24-hour load curve
is more constant, the rectification process can be accelerated
by choosing a smaller time factor.
266
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
15.8
E-LAN (Energy Local Area Network)
Each bus station (REG-DA) has two E-LAN interfaces. Socalled line-to-line operation is enabled through these interfaces.
In this operating mode, each Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring works as a bus station and, at the
same time, as a bus repeater which regenerates distorted
rectangular forms and which increases the output level to the
setpoint value. Up to 255 bus stations can be connected to the
E-LAN.
All bus stations can thus communicate with each other or be
centrally controlled (see WinREG operating manual for selection
and details).
Features
❑ 255 bus stations can be addressed
❑ Multimaster structure
❑ Integrated repeater function
❑ Open ring, bus or combination of bus and ring
❑ Record based on SDLC/HDLC frames
❑ Transmission rate 15.6 ... 325 kbits/s
❑ Telegram length 10 ... 30 Byte
❑ Average throughput: approx. 100 telegrams / s
For technical data and the pin assignment, please refer to Page
41.
For information on the Configuration, see E-LAN (Energy Local
Area Network) on page see "E-LAN (Energy-Local Area
Network)" on page 101.
REGSys™ - Übersicht
LW
L
R
S4
85
Et
he
R
S2
32
rn
et
E-LAN
WinREG
IEC 61850
IEC 60850-5-101/103/104
MODBUS, SPABUS,
LONMark, DNP 3.00
EOR-D
a . e b er le gmbh
a. e be r le gmbh
EOR-D
a. e be r le gmbh
EOR -D
Stat us
Stat us
Stat us
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
Windows 95
Windows 98
Windows NT
Windows 2000
Windows XP
EOR-D
St atus
3
4
2
3
3
4
4
Reset
C OM1
a. e be r le gmbh
4
Reset
Reset
Reset
COM1
COM1
COM1
EOR-D
E-LAN
E-LAN
COM3
RS485
a. eberlegmbh
P QI- D
a. eberlegmbh
a. ebe rle gmbh
Status
1
2
3
4
Reset
C O M1
ANA-D
E-
REG-BO
5
km
PQI-D
ANA-D
<
REG-DA
RS485
PAN - D
Status
a. eberle
Störung
REG - D
gmbh
a. eberle gmbh
Status
Lauflampe
MMU-D
F1
Regler
a. eberlegmbh
a. eb e rle gmbh
Störung
Auslösung
Stufenschalter
Rückführung
läuft
F2
>U
>I
Leitungsschalter
F3
REG - DE
Stat us
Status
<U
< U1
> U2
>> U3
a. eber le
A: REG -D E
AB GE STIMMT
V = +4.5 A
d =
2.0 A
F2
Uo
10
2
F3
3
F4
>> U4
F5
>I
1
4
F4
0.1
F5
Reset
20A I m in
AUTO
gm bh
12:3 4:0 0
F1
Re geln
Ipos = 98 .0 A
Uo = 0.85 %
M
1
LA
N
ANA-D
BIN-D
E-LAN
Test
COM1
AUTO
ESC
MENU
COM1
C O M1
AU TO
ESC
I max 200A
MENU
C OM1
REG-PC
ANA-D
REG-D
PAN-D
MMU-D
REG-ST
REG-DP
REG-BO
COM1
RS232
RS232
BCD-CODE (Stufenstellung)
Fernwirkeinrichtung
a. eberlegmbh
a. eberlegmbh
ANA-D
REG-S
BCD-CODE
ANA-D
REG-F(X)
REG-DA operating manual
267
REG-DA
E-LAN networking example
2-wire bus
Note
All of the devices of the
REGSys™ family can be
connected to the bus.
REGSys™ components can be
identified by the D after the
hyphen.
Example: REG-D, PQI-D, EOR-D,
REG-DP, REG-DM, CPR-D,
REG-DPA, ...
REG-DA
Bus left
Bus right
72 71 70 69
EA+ EA- E+ E-
76 75 74 73
EA+ EA- E+ E-
Bus terminated
REG-DA
Bus left
Bus right
72 71 70 69
EA+ EA- E+ E-
76 75 74 73
EA+ EA- E+ E-
Bus terminated
REG-DA
REG-DA
Bus left
Bus right
Bus left
Bus right
72 71 70 69
EA+ EA- E+ E-
76 75 74 73
EA+ EA- E+ E-
72 71 70 69
EA+ EA- E+ E-
76 75 74 73
EA+ EA- E+ E-
2-wire bus
Bus open
Bus terminated
REG-DA
REG-DA
Bus left
Bus right
Bus left
Bus right
72 71 70 69
EA+ EA- E+ E-
76 75 74 73
EA+ EA- E+ E-
72 71 70 69
EA+ EA- E+ E-
76 75 74 73
EA+ EA- E+ E-
4-wire bus
Bus terminated
268
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Types of lines
Each of the E-LAN interfaces of a bus station can operate on a
2-wire line or on a 4-wire line. A 2-wire line is usually selected
because this is the only option which permits a bus
configuration with several bus stations on the same bus line.
The transmission line must be connected with a 100 Ω resistor
at its beginning and end. Reflections can occur if the
terminating resistance is not present. These distort the signal,
increase the line damping, reduce the maximum transmission
distance of the line and cause error functions.
The terminating resistances are already integrated into the
REG-DA and can be switched on and off via the operating
panel (termination).
Topology
The topology of the network, i.e. the connection of each bus
station to the bus, may be freely selected and combined.
The maximum permissible transfer rate depends on the
selected operating mode (2-wire or 4-wire connection) and on
the bus length.
The permissible separations are summarised in the table below:
Baud rate
(KBaud)
4-wire
2-wire
15,6
1.2 km
≤ 0.1 km
31,2
1.2 km
≤ 0.1 km
62,5
1.2 km
≤ 0.1 km
125
1.0 km
≤ 0.1 km
375
0.8 km
Not
recommended
REG-DA operating manual
269
REG-DA
Bus segment
Up to 8 bus stations can be connected to one bus segment
(line between two stations without boosters).
Up to 16 bus stations can be connected to one bus segment if
all of the spur-line connections are as short as possible and the
total loop resistance of the transmission line is < 100 Ohms.
Multimaster structure
The E-LAN has a multimaster structure, i.e. any bus station can
operate as the bus master.
Each Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring in the
E-LAN can access all the data from all the other bus stations.
Unique addressing
Each bus station on the E-LAN must be assigned a unique
address. 255 freely selectable addresses are possible.
An address has the form: A, A1 ... A9, B, B1 ... B9, Z, Z1 ... Z4
Bus station index
Each bus station automatically generates an internal index of all
bus stations with valid addresses in the E-LAN.
Every three seconds, each bus station in the E-LAN sends a socalled broadcast message to all of the other bus stations so
that each bus station can adapt their internal index accordingly.
If the broadcast message of a bus station is interrupted for
more than 20 seconds, the other bus stations will delete the
corresponding bus station from their internal index. A list of all
bus stations can be loaded via the operating panel.
The background program can be used to specify that the
omission of a bus station is indicated via a signal (relay, LED) or
a text message on the display.
270
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
15.9
Voltage regulation with transformers
operating in parallel
If transformers operating in parallel do not have same data
(EMK, uk, switching group, number of tap-change positions),
an additional circulating reactive current will permanently flow
within this parallel-switching circuit. This circulating reactive
current generates losses and is independent of the load current
and must therefore be avoided.
Regulation criteria
In the case of parallel-switching on a busbar, the terminal
voltage of all of the transformers - even with different tapchange positions - is compulsorily set to the same amount.
Therefore the voltage alone cannot be a regulation criteria for
transformers with different characteristic quantities. The voltage
regulation must be supplemented by a circulating current
regulation to be able to control transformers operating in
parallel on a busbar to the appropriate voltage that is required
and to the same tap-change position.
If all the transformers are the same, stable parallel-switching
can be achieved using the voltage and tap-changes (masterslave, MSI).
Command variable
The REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring regulate the voltage on the undervoltage side (on the
measurement transformer) of each transformer to a common
command variable which depends on the sum current of the
transformers operating in parallel.
Sum current (only relevant in the event of current influence)
The currents of all of the transformers can be summed in one
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring by
networking the REG-DA Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring of all of the transformers operating in
parallel via one bus. This sum current and the selected gradient
of the Uf/IL characteristic line is the uniform base for the
current-dependent influence of the command variable W for all
Relays.
REG-DA operating manual
271
REG-DA
Due to the use of a normalised sum current, the gradient of the
Uf/IL characteristic can be set independently of the number and
different types of characteristic data of the transformers
operating in parallel (nominal power, short circuit voltage), so
that changes in these parameters do not require resetting the
gradient Gnom.
15.9.1
Regulation programs
for transformers operating in parallel
The following procedures are available:
➪ ∆I sin ϕ − procedure
(minimisation of the circulating reactive current Icirc sin ϕ)
➪ ∆I sin ϕ (S) − procedure
(minimisation of the circulating reactive current Icirc sin ϕ
when operating transformers in parallel with various
apparent powers)
➪ Master-slave procedure (forced parallel operation, same
tap-change position) for all the transformers in parallel.
➪ ∆cos ϕ − procedure
(minimisation of the circulating reactive current Icirc sin ϕ for
transformers that cannot communicate using E-LAN)
➪ MSI - Master Slave Independent − procedure
Parameters
Parameters determine the extent to which the parallel
regulation programs may affect regulation.
Different parameter menus are available depending on the type
of regulation program selected for operating the transformers in
parallel.
➪ Influence of the circulating current regulation
➪ Limitation of the influence of the circulating current
regulation
➪ Setpoint value of the cos ϕ of the network (cos ϕset)
➪ Nominal power of the transformer
272
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
➪ Transformer group list (addresses of relays activated by the
menu or a binary signal (e.g. ParaGramer) that regulate
transformers operating in parallel on a busbar)
15.9.2
Functional principle
Minimisation of the circulating reactive current
The reactive component (Icirc sin ϕ) of the circulating current
Icirc should ideally be zero or at least be minimised.
Since the voltage cannot be changed continuously (tapchanges occur in increments), it is generally not possible to
achieve the condition Icirc sin ϕ = 0.
To minimise the reactive component of the circulating current,
each Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
measures the reactive component I sin ϕ of the load currents
for each transformer of the group list, calculates the circulating
reactive current Icirc sin ϕ of the assigned transformer and sets
the tap-changer position in such a way that this circulating
reactive current is minimised.
15.9.3
Influence of the circulating current regulation
The size of the voltage change depends on the “influence of the
circulating current regulation” parameters as well as on their
degree of limitation. Larger permissible circulating currents (i.e.
influence of circulating current regulation is lower) cause the
precision of the circulating current regulation to be lowered
which could result in tap-change differences of more than one
tap-change.
Limitation of the influence of the circulating current regulation
Under normal operating conditions, the voltage regulation and
the circulating current regulation are independent of each other
(the limitation value of the influence of the circulating current
regulation lies far above the normal operation value).
Only under extreme conditions, including:
➪ Operating transformers in parallel with previously different
tap-change positions
➪ Manual change of the tap-change position
➪ ∆cos ϕ-regulation for cos ϕnet ≠ cos ϕset
REG-DA operating manual
273
REG-DA
can the system be regulated to achieve either optimal voltage
stability or optimal minimisation of the circulating reactive
current. The user chooses his/her priority by setting the
respective parameters.
This means that if voltage regulation is to be given priority over
circulating current regulation, the influence of the circulating
current regulation can be limited to a minimum value which
must nevertheless be higher than zero.
15.9.4
Activation of the regulation program
Both the regulation program selected via the menu, and the
addresses of the transformers/relays specified for operating in
parallel are stored in a “group list” (SETUP 1, programs..., Par.
parameters...). The operation in parallel and its reset are
activated via a freely selectable binary input (SETUP 5, Add-On
6).
The corresponding activation may be carried out via a pulse or
a high-level continuous signal.
A “self-learning” regulation program (ParaGramer) is also
available through which the relays on the E-LAN permanently
check which transformers are feeding on which busbar. The
transformer group list is constantly updated in accordance with
these results.
The ParProg parameter can be used to determine if a parallel
program is active or not and can be assigned to a freely
programmable LED or relay. An error function is indicated with
(ParErr) or TapErr.
Further information can be found in chapter 9.
274
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
15.9.5
Description of the regulation programs
15.9.5.1 The ∆I sin ϕ procedure
Functional principle:
The value of the reactive current should be the same value, IbA
= IbB = IbC = ... , for each of the transformers operating in
parallel A, B, C,... .
If this condition is fulfilled, the circulating reactive current is zero.
Area of application:
Parallel operation on a busbar with a maximum of 10
transformers with nearly equal nominal power, nearly equal
short circuit voltage and the same switching group.
The tap-change increments may differ and the cos ϕ in the
network can take any values requested.
Prerequisites:
The short circuit voltages, Uk of the transformers operating in
parallel should only differ by a small amount:
(0.90 ukn-1 < ukn < 1.10 ukn-1) and the nominal powers should be
approximately the same.
The ∆I sin ϕ [S] program is available when transformers with
different nominal powers are used.
Parameters to be entered:
➪ Permissible circulating current (depends on the change in
the circulating reactive current ∆Icirc sin ϕ = Ib** - Ib* per
tap-change of the assigned transformer)
➪ Group list of the relays/transformers (addresses of relays
which can be activated via the menu, ParaGramer or a
binary signal, that control transformers that are operating in
parallel on a busbar)
➪ Maximum tap difference between the transformers
(SETUP 5, Add-On 6)
REG-DA operating manual
275
REG-DA
Permissible Icirc:
The correct value is derived as follows:
➪ Operate all Relays in MANUAL mode and set all the
transformers that are in the group list to the tap-change
position that causes approximately the same terminal
voltage. Note the value of the reactive current (Ib = Isin ϕ =
reactive component of the load current)(measurement
transducer mode). The value of the reactive current must be
approximately the same in all of the other transformers.
➪ Change each transformer successively by one tap-change
position.
➪ The reactive current changes. The difference between the
new value (Ib** = 2nd measurement value) and the old value
(Ib* = 1st measurement value) is considered to be the 1st
approximation to the “perm. Icirc”.
Since the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
supposed to reset the transformer that was changed by one
level back to the previous tap-changer position, the permissible
circulating current (perm. Icirc) can be set to a lower value than
the value found in the 1st approximation.
i.e.: permissible Icirc > 0.6 (Ib** - Ib*).
Low values can produce oscillations in the regulation, in
particular when the transformers have different tap-changer
increments or different short circuit voltages.
Note
Please note that the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring may under certain
circumstances also issue a tap-change command when
the permissible circulating reactive current is not
exceeded.
This is because a tap-change command is always
issued if either the permissible voltage limit or the
maximum permissible circulating reactive current is
exceeded.
276
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
ParErr
ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel
error) and automatically switches a group of transformers
operating in parallel from the Automatic operating mode to the
Manual operating mode.
To avoid having the transformers “diverge”, a max. tap
difference (SETUP 5, Add-on 6) can be entered that is also
monitored by the error flag “ParErr”.
If the set max. tap difference is exceeded, the ParErr error flag
is set and the operation in parallel is switched to the manual
operating mode − providing that Sysctrl Bit 6 has been set.
Note
Bit 6 has been set on delivery!
Although the tap-change positions are not required for
operation in parallel the ∆I sinϕ, ∆I sinϕ (S) and ∆cosϕ currentdependent procedures, the functioning of the tap-change can
nevertheless be monitored if required.
Information on the tap-changer is not mandatory for operating
in parallel (as mentioned above), because the regulation only
derives the regulation commands from the current and the
voltage (value and angle) and not from the tap-change position
of the transformer.
TapErr
The TapErr error flag signals errors in the transmission of the
tap-change position or errors in the coding/decoding of the
tap-changer. In the∆sinϕ procedure, TapErr is only locally
effective, i.e. it only affects the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring where the tap error has occurred.
We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or
a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the
position return signal, making it easier to rectify the error.
If a transformer is operating in parallel, the TapErr error flag is
set when - after a tap-change - the logically expected tapchange position is not established within 1.5 x running time of
the tap-change.
REG-DA operating manual
277
REG-DA
In general, every Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring expects the logically next step that follows a tapchange increment. If the reaction of the system is illogical,
TapErr will be activated.
The following are considered to be tap errors:
1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction
Example: The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring outputs a “raise” command and the tap-changer
reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring outputs a “lower” command and the
tap-changer reacts with a higher tap-change.
Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have
been confused or the motor drive is behaving inversely.
Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring increases the ratio in the event of a
higher tap-change, thus lowering the voltage.
In most cases, it is to be expected that an increase in the tapchange position results in a higher voltage, whereas a decrease
in the tap-change position results in a lower voltage.
Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals
2. No tap-change
Example:
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring outputs
a command, but the tap-change position does not change.
In this case, it must be assumed that either the position
confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.
278
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
3. Illogical tap-changes
If no signal is received from the next higher or next lower tapchange position after a raise or lower command is issued, the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring interprets
this as a fault in the tap-change signal and the TapErr flag is set.
Tap limitation
If the tap is to be limited from either above or below, please
enter the following background program lines via the WinREG
terminal program:
H 7=‘RegStufe-,Lower tap limitation,<=,if,RegSperreT =3,
else,RegSperreT =0’
H 8=‘RegStufe-,Upper tap limitation,>=,if,RegSperreH =3,
else,RegSperreH =0’
In place of the “Upper tap limitation“, enter the desired upper tap
limitation for your requirements and in place of the “Lower tap
limitation” enter the lower tap limitation.
Note
The assignment of program lines H7 and H8 is arbitrary,
and you can use any two program lines of your choice.
REG-DA operating manual
279
REG-DA
15.9.5.2 The ∆I sin ϕ (S) procedure
Functional principle:
The relationship between the value of the reactive current and
the nominal power should be the same value IbA/SnA = IbB/SnB
= IbC/SnC = ... for each of the transformers A, B, C,... operated
in parallel!
If this condition is fulfilled, the circulating reactive current is zero.
Area of application:
Transformers with different nominal powers which feed via one
busbar in the network. Both the switching group as well as the
short circuit voltages of the transformers should be as equal as
possible because deviations may cause a different load
utilisation of the transformers.
Prerequisites:
The permissible limits for different short circuit voltages are as
follows: 0.90 ukn-1 < ukn < 1.10 ukn-1
Parameters to be entered:
➪ Permissible circulating current (depends on the change in
the circulating reactive current ∆Icirc sin ϕ = Ib** - Ib* per
tap-change of the assigned transformer; lb* = 1st
measurement value, lb** = 2nd measurement value). In the
case of transformers switched in parallel that have different
nominal powers, it is necessary to measure the permissible
circulating current for each transformer separately and to
enter it in the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring.
➪ Nominal power of the connected transformer.
➪ Group list of the relays/transformers (addresses of relays
which can be activated via the menu, ParaGramer or a
binary signal, that control transformers that are operating in
parallel on a busbar)
➪ Maximum tap difference between the transformers
(SETUP 5, Add-On 6)
280
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Permissible Icirc:
The correct value is derived as follows:
➪ Operate all Relays in MANUAL mode and set all the
address/transformers that are in the group list to the tapchange position, that causes approximately the same
terminal voltage. Note the value of the reactive current Ib (to
view in measurement transducer mode).
➪ Change each transformer successively by one tap-change
position.
➪ The change to the reactive current ∆Ib, the difference
between the new value (Ib** = 2nd measurement value) and
the old value (Ib* = 1st measurement value), is considered
to be the 1st approximation for the permissible “Icirc”.
Since the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring is
supposed to then reset the transformer to the previous tapchange position, the permissible circulating current (permissible
Icirc) must be set to the following value.
i.e.: permissible Icirc > 0.6 (lb** - lb*).
Oscillations in the regulation may occur for smaller values.
ParErr
ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel
error) and automatically switches a group of transformers
operating in parallel from the Automatic operating mode to the
Manual operating mode.
To avoid having the transformers “diverge”, a max. tap
difference (SETUP 5, Add-on 6) can be entered that is also
monitored by the error flag “ParErr”.
If the set max. tap difference is exceeded, the ParErr error flag
is set and the operation in parallel is switched to the manual
operating mode − providing that Sysctrl Bit 6 has been set.
Note
Bit 6 has been set on delivery!
Although the tap-change positions are not required for
operation in parallel the ∆I sinϕ, ∆I sinϕ (S) and ∆cosϕ currentREG-DA operating manual
281
REG-DA
dependent procedures, the functioning of the tap-change can
nevertheless be monitored if required.
Information on the tap-changer is not mandatory for operating
in parallel (as mentioned above), because the regulation only
derives the regulation commands from the current and the
voltage (value and angle) and not from the tap-change position
of the transformer.
TapErr
The error flag TapErr signals errors in the transmission of the
tap-change position or errors in the coding/decoding of the
tap-changer. In the∆sinϕ procedure, TapErr is only locally
effective, i.e. it only affects the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring where the tap error has occurred.
We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or
a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the
position return signal, making it easier to rectify the error.
If a transformer is operating in parallel, the TapErr error flag is
set when - after a tap-change - the logically expected tapchange position is not established within 1.5 x running time of
the tap-change.
In general, every Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring expects the logically next step that follows a tapchange increment. If the reaction of the system is illogical,
TapErr will be activated.
282
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The following are considered to be tap errors:
1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction
Example: The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring outputs a “raise” command and the tap-changer
reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring outputs a “lower” command and the
tap-changer reacts with a higher tap-change.
Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have
been confused or the motor drive is behaving inversely.
Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring increases the ratio in the event of a
higher tap-change, thus lowering the voltage.
In most cases, it is to be expected that an increase in the tapchange position results in a higher voltage, whereas a decrease
in the tap-change position results in a lower voltage.
Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals
2. No tap-change
Example:
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring outputs
a command, but the tap-change position does not change.
In this case, it must be assumed that either the position
confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.
3. Illogical tap-changes
If no signal is received from the next higher or next lower tapchange position after a raise or lower command is issued, the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring interprets
this as a fault in the tap-change signal and the TapErr flag is set.
REG-DA operating manual
283
REG-DA
Tap limitation
If the tap is to be limited from either above or below, please
enter the following background program lines via the WinREG
terminal program:
H 7=‘RegStufe-,Lower tap limitation,<=,if,RegSperreT =3,
else,RegSperreT =0’
H 8=‘RegStufe-,Upper tap limitation,>=,if,RegSperreH =3,
else,RegSperreH =0’
In place of the “Upper tap limitation“, enter the desired upper tap
limitation for your requirements and in place of the “Lower tap
limitation” enter the lower tap limitation.
Note
The assignment of program lines H7 and H8 is arbitrary,
and you can use any two program lines of your choice.
15.9.5.3 Master-Slave procedure / MSI procedure
Only transformer types with identical electrical (output, short
circuit voltage, voltage between the tap-changer positions,
switching groups, etc.) and mechanical features (number of
tap-change positions, position of the deadband) are suitable for
MSI operation.
A different procedure should be used if one or more of the
parameters differ.
In addition, it must be ensured that each Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring receives the information
regarding the tap-change position of “its” transformer.
The recording and transmission of the correct tap-change
position is one of the mandatory prerequisites of the masterslave tap-change equalisation procedure.
Every potential “candidate” must be listed in the group list with
its address in order to notify the system of the number of relays/
transformers that should take part in parallel operation.
Moreover, the tap-change of each Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring involved in the parallel-switching
operation must be switched on (menu SETUP 5, Add-On 1, F4)
before the parallel-switching operation is activated.
284
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
The MSI (master-slave-independent procedure) is a special
version of the master-slave program (see "Parallel operation
using the “Master-Slave-Independent (MSI)” procedure" on
page 173).
After the parallel-switching operation has been activated, the
master will regulate the slave, or - in the master-slave cycle - the
slaves, to the tap-change position which it itself is in. It then
switches to master-slave mode which causes all of the
transformers involved in the parallel-switching operation to
change taps simultaneously.
In the master-slave program, the slaves do not become slaves
until they have reached the tap-change position that was
specified by the master.
As long as they are not in the same tap-change position, they
remain in the slave mode.
This differentiation and/or change can also be followed in the
status line of the regulator.
The precondition for the master-slave operation is that each
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring must be fed
the present tap-change position of “its” transformer by means
of a BCD, binary signal, mA signal or resistance value.
Parameters to be entered:
➪ Transformer group list
➪ Selection of activation, see chapter 9.
For operating the master-slave procedure it is mandatory that
the tap-change position is signalled correctly. For this reason,
error flags have been developed which immediately recognise
errors and then set the regulation to the MANUAL operating
mode if necessary.
TapErr
In the master-slave procedure, TapErr affects the entire group.
We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or
a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the
position confirmation signal making it easier to rectify the error.
If a transformer is operating in parallel, the error flag TapErr is
set when - after a tap-change - the logically expected tapREG-DA operating manual
285
REG-DA
changer position is not established within 1.5 x tap-changer
runtime. In this case the entire group will be switched from
AUTOMATIC to MANUAL.
In general, every Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring expects the logically next step that follows a tapchange increment. If the reaction of the system is illogical,
TapErr will be activated.
The following are considered to be tap errors:
1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction
Example: The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring outputs a “raise” command and the tap-changer
reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring outputs a “lower” command and the
tap-changer reacts with a higher tap-change.
Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have
been confused or the motor drive is behaving inversely.
Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring increases the transformer ratio in the
event of a higher tap-change, thus lowering the voltage.
In most cases, it is to be expected that an increase in the tapchange position results in a higher voltage, whereas a decrease
in the tap-change position results in a lower voltage.
Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals
2. No tap-change
Example:
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring outputs
a command, but the tap-change position does not change.
In this case, it must be assumed that either the position
confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.
286
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
3. Illogical tap-changes
If no signal is received from the next higher or next lower tapchange position after a raise or lower command is issued, the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring interprets
this as a fault in the tap-change signal and the TapErr flag is set.
We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or
a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the
position confirmation signal making it easier to rectify the error.
ParErr
ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in general (parallel
error) and automatically switches a group of transformers
operating in parallel from the Automatic operating mode to the
Manual operating mode.
ParrErr is triggered when a tap difference occurs between two
transformers operating in parallel which is larger than the
specified permissible difference.
Note
The ParErr error flag is also triggered when the permis.
Icirc is exceeded.
An alternative procedure can be specified if this behaviour is not
desired. Otherwise only the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring that carried out the tap-change that
lead to the permissible maximum tap difference being exceed
will be switched over to the manual operating mode.
Note
If you prefer this behaviour, please contact our company
headquarters.
REG-DA operating manual
287
REG-DA
15.9.5.4 The ∆cos ϕ procedure
Functional principle:
By means of the set cos ϕset, the ratio between the active
current I cos ϕ and the reactive current I sin ϕ of the transformer
(load currents) is set to the required value. Regulation is
executed in such a way that the cos ϕ of the transformer is
regulated to the set value cos ϕset.
The cos ϕ of the network is set on the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring. The Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring should ideally keep this value constant.
The constancy of the cos ϕnet value is the guage of quality of the
regulation. Deviations from the set value negatively affect the
regulation results because there is a small voltage change when
cos ϕnet ≠ cos ϕset (inequality between the present value of the
cos ϕ of the network and the set cos ϕset).
A self-adapting solution to the program can be implemented if
the net cos ϕ changes by a large amount (depending on the
time of day/year).
In this case the program continuously measures the cos ϕ at
the connection point. The setpoint value of the net cos ϕ is
adjusted after an integration over a selectable period of time.
This means that a network with multiple feeding transformers
that cannot communicate with each other can remain
approximately free of circulating reactive currents.
Area of application:
Transformers which are feeding on one network independently
of each other and where it is not possible to implement a bus
link between the assigned relays.
Parameters to be entered:
➪ Permissible reactive current difference > 0.6 x (lb** - lb*)
➪ Limitation of the influence of the circulating current
regulation
➪ Setpoint value of the cos ϕ of the network (cos ϕset)
288
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Although the tap-change positions are not required for
operation in parallel the ∆I sinϕ, ∆I sinϕ (S) and ∆cosϕ currentdependent procedures, the functioning of the tap-change can
nevertheless be monitored if required.
Information on the tap-changer is not mandatory for operating
a parallel-switching operation (as mentioned above), because
the regulation only derives the regulation commands from the
current and the voltage (value and angle) and not from the tapchange position of the transformer.
TapErr
TapErr is only effective locally, that is it only affects the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring where the tap error
has occurred.
We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or
a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the
position confirmation signal making it easier to rectify the error.
In general, every Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring expects the logically next step that follows a tapchange increment. If the reaction of the system is illogical,
TapErr will be activated.
The following are considered to be tap errors:
1. Tap-changes in the wrong direction
Example: The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring outputs a “raise” command and the tap-changer
reacts with a lower tap-change or the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring outputs a “lower” command and the
tap-changer reacts with a higher tap-change.
Possible causes of the error: The raise and lower signals have
been confused or the motor drive is behaving inversely.
Inverse behaviour implies that the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring increases the transformer ratio in the
event of a higher tap-change, thus lowering the voltage.
REG-DA operating manual
289
REG-DA
In most cases, it is to be expected that an increase in the tapchange position results in a higher voltage, whereas a decrease
in the tap-change position results in a lower voltage.
Remedy: Exchange the raise and lower signals
2. No tap-change
Example:
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring outputs
a command, but the tap-change position does not change.
In this case, it must be assumed that either the position
confirmation signal or the motor drive is defective.
3. Illogical tap-changes
If the next higher or lower tap-change position is not signalled
back after the tap-change position has been raised or lowered,
the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
interprets the position check-back signal as being defective
and sets the error flag TapErr.
We recommend assigning the error bit TapErr to a LED and/or
a relay to inform the operating personnel about the status of the
position confirmation signal making it easier to rectify the error.
290
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
15.9.5.5 The ∆cos ϕ emergency program
Functional principle:
In order to keep the circulating current regulation stable, even
during bus faults (E-LAN), an emergency program is
incorporated in the ∆I sin ϕ and
∆I sin ϕ (S) programs. This program is activated as soon as the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring recognises
a bus error
(E-LAN - Error). All relays connected to the E-LAN will return to
their previous program 10 seconds after the bus error has been
eliminated.
The ∆cos ϕ program is used as an emergency program,
whereby the regulation is not carried out to the entered cos ϕset
but to the last present
cos ϕSum of the network that was measured by the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring (ϕSum = angle
between the sum current and the network voltage). Thus the
voltage regulation is not affected and the parallel operation of
the transformers also remains stable.
If the cos ϕSum of the network changes (an event that usually
occurs only slowly, not suddenly), the network voltage changes
only slightly, because the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring tries to find a compromise between the
minimum difference of the measured cos ϕSum of the network
and the present cosϕSum of the network as well as the minimum
difference between the command variable W and the actual
value X of the voltage.
REG-DA operating manual
291
REG-DA
15.10 Nominal transformation of the measurement
transformers
The decisive factors for the nominal transformation ratio Kn of
a measurement transformer are the nominal value X1N of the
primary factor and the nominal value X2N of the secondary
factor.
1N
Kn = X
-----------X 2N
Knu = nominal transformation ratio of the voltage transformers
Kni = nominal transformation ratio of the current transformers
Nominal transformation of current transformers
Example:
X 1N = 1000 A
X 2N = 5 A
A- = 200
Kni = 1000
----------------5A
Nominal transformation ratio of the voltage transformers
Example:
X1N = 110 kV
X 2N = 100 V
kV- ÷ 100
V- = 110
kV- = 1100
---------------------------------------------Knu = 110
100 V
3
3
292
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
15.11 Self-Conduct
Each active control level of the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring (MANUAL/ AUTOMATIC) maintains its
status even after a failure of the auxiliary voltage.
If the auxiliary voltage is interrupted, the “WITH” self-conduct
setting causes the Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring to continue running in the AUTOMATIC operating
mode after the event; this is only possible if the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring was operating in the
AUTOMATIC operating mode before the malfunction occurred.
In the situation mentioned above, the “WITHOUT” self-conduct
setting would cause the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring to change to the MANUAL operating
mode after the event.
15.12 LCD display
15.12.1 LCD contrast
The contrast can be changed (see "LCD contrast (display)" on
page 94).
15.12.2 LCD Saver
The LCD display switches off after 1 hour.
15.12.3 Background illumination
The background illumination switches off 15 minutes after the
keypad was last used.
Pressing any key switches the background illumination on
again.
REG-DA operating manual
293
REG-DA
16
294
Definition of the Abbreviations
Abbreviation
Definition
OFF
OFF
Trigger
Trigger
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring stops further regulation
procedures until the limit value violation has
been rectified.
AUTO
Automatic operation
Triple-wound
Triple-wound application
ELAN Err
E-LAN error (error on bus)
ELAN-L
E-LAN left
ELAN-R
E-LAN right
up/down
LED indicates raise or lower, when control
command is given.
InputErr
Input-Error
If the setpoint value change (SW1 to SW2) is
carried out at the binary input, InputErr will
become active if both signals are there at the
same time.
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring retains the old value and displays
InputErr.
TC-Err+
Exceeding the running time of the tapchanger indicated as a wiping signal
TC-Err.
Exceeding the running time of the tapchanger indicated as a continuous signal
TC. i. Op
Maximum time TC in operation lamp
The time the motor drive requires to change
from one tap to the next
LDC
Line drop compensation
Par-Prog
Parallel program activated or not activated
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Abbreviation
Definition
ParErr
ParrErr stands for a faulty parallel operation in
general (parallel error) and automatically
switches a group of transformers operating in
parallel from the Automatic operating mode to
the Manual operating mode.
If this behaviour is not desired, a different type
of behaviour can be selected via the SysCtrl
feature. In this case please contact our
headquarters.
Please also refer to “Description of the
regulation programs” on Page 275.
PhaseFail
Function only available in PAN-D or relays
with Feature M2. PhaseFail is active if one of
the three phases fails.
TapErr
TapErr is a signal that indicates a problem
with the tap-change position. The name is
derived from the term “tap error”.
Unlike ParErr, Tap Err is only effective locally,
i.e. it is only indicated on the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring on which
the tap-changer position error has occurred.
It can also switch the group working in parallel
to MANUAL when operating in the masterslave or MSI procedure.
LEVEL
Level-controlled function
PROG
Function triggered by background program
creepNBD
Creeping net breakdown
Quick
High-speed switching
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring switches in the quickest possible
time within the tolerance band
Inh. Low
Setting to a standstill
The Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring stops all further regulation until the
limit value violation has been rectified
SP-1
Setpoint value 1
REG-DA operating manual
295
REG-DA
296
Abbreviation
Definition
SP-2
Setpoint value 2
SP-3
Setpoint value 3
SP-4
Setpoint value 4
SP-decr.
Decrease setpoint value via the binary input
(lower)
SP-incr.
Increase setpoint value via the binary input
(raise)
SP2Level
Level-controlled switching to setpoint value 2
Trans1
/Trans1
Transit channel 1
Binary input signal can be “given” to a freelyprogrammable relay.
Examples:
BI 1 on Trans 1
Rel 3 on Trans 1
ã
BI 1 = 1
ã
BI 1 = 0
ã
REL 3 = 1
REL 3 = 0
BI 1 on Trans 1
Rel 3 on /Trans 1
ã
BI 1 = 1
ã
BI 1 = 0
ã
REL 3 = 0
REL 3 = 1
Trans2
/Trans2
See Trans1
PG_CB
ParaGramer, low-voltage side,
Circuit breaker
PG_IS1
ParaGramer, low-voltage side,
Isolator 1
PG_IS2
ParaGramer, low-voltage side,
Isolator 2
PG_CP
ParaGramer, low-voltage side,
Bar coupler
PG_SC1
ParaGramer, low-voltage side,
Line coupler 1
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Abbreviation
Definition
PG_SC2
ParaGramer, low-voltage side,
Line coupler 2
PG_H_CB
ParaGramer, High-voltage side,
Circuit breaker
PG_H_IS1
ParaGramer, High-voltage side,
Isolator 1
PG_H_IS2
ParaGramer, High-voltage side,
Isolator 2
PG_H_CP
ParaGramer, High-voltage side,
Bar coupler
PG_H_SC1
ParaGramer, High-voltage side,
Line coupler1
PG_H_SC2
ParaGramer, High-voltage side,
Line coupler2
BCD1
BCD/BIN code, value 1
BCD2
BCD/BIN code, value 2
BCD4
BCD/BIN code, value 4
BCD8
BCD/BIN code, value 8
BCD10
BCD/BIN code, value 10
BCD20
BCD/BIN code, value 20
BCDminus
BCD/BIN code, “-” sign
BIN16
BIN code, value 16
BIN32
BIN code, value 32
PANmiss
Set if associated PAN - D is not available
REG-DA operating manual
297
REG-DA
Abbreviation
Definition
LR_AH
Local/remote operation together with the
REG_LR device will be activated as soon as
the input functions LR_AH and LR_STAT are
used. These inputs are connected with the
corresponding outputs of the REG_LR
device. As long as the REG_LR device holds
the status line LR_STAT active (1), the AUTO/
MANUAL status of the Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring will be
determined by the input LR_AH (1:AUTO,
0:MANUAL). Raise/lower commands may
only come from the Relay for Voltage Control
& Transformer Monitoring drive (in the case of
AUTO). As soon as the status of the REG_LR
device falls (0), the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring will revert to the
AUTO/MANUAL operating mode which
applied 1s before the drop in the LR_STAT
signal. The Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring will then continue to
work as usual.
Special case: LR_STAT is not used, i.e. only
the input function LR_AH is activated. In this
case, it is always assumed that LR_STAT is
active.
LR_STAT
If only the LR_STATUS input function is used,
the following applies:
LR_STAT active (1):
Remote operation, i.e. MANUAL/AUTO and
raise/lower only via inputs or REG-L.
LR_STAT inactive (0):
Local operation, i.e. MANUAL/AUTO and
raise/lower only via the keypad.
298
T60s/1s
Outputs a 1 s signal as a pulse (relay) or lights
the LED every 60 s
COM2ACT
Gives information about the status of the
COM 2 (1: busy, 0: not busy)
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Note
Further parameters and hence abbreviations are
required in certain circumstances depending on the
additionally selected features (e.g. TMM).
The descriptions of the statuses will be delivered with
the appropriate operating manual update.
REG-DA operating manual
299
REG-DA
17
300
Symbols and their Definition
Symbol
Definition
> I [%]
Upper limit value of the current
(of the transformer)
< I [%]
Lower limit value of the current
(of the transformer)
> U [%]
Upper limit value of the voltage
(of the transformer)
< U [%]
Lower limit value of the voltage
(of the transformer)
∆I [A]
Difference between 2 current values
∆U [V]
Difference between 2 voltage levels
AA1 ... AAn
Analogue output (mA)
AI1 ... AIn
Analogue input (mA)
BO1 ... BO
Binary output
(USt. : 10 V ... 50 V)
E1 ... En
Binary input
(USt. : 48 V ... 230 V)
Ft [1]
Time factor for time behaviour
of the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring
I1n [A]
Nominal value of the primary
current transformer
(of the transformer)
I2n [A]
Nominal value of the secondary
current transformer
(of the transformer)
Icirc [A]
Circulating current in parallelswitched transformers
Icirc sin ϕ [A]
Reactive component of the
circulating current Icirc
I [A]
Delivered load current
of the transformer
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
Symbol
Definition
I sin ϕ = Ib [A]
Reactive component of the load
current
(short reactive current Ib)
Kni [1]
Transformer mounting ratio of the
current transformer
Knu [1]
Transformer mounting ratio voltage
transformer
R1 ... Rn
Relay outputs
S [VA]
Apparent power
Sn [VA]
Nominal power of the transformer
St [%]
Gradient of the Uf/I characteristic
line
Gnom [%]
Nominal value of the gradient
of the Uf/I characteristic line
tb [s]
Basic time; standard value for
tb = 30 s for Xwb = 1 %
tV [s]
Reaction delay of a control
command
U1N [kV]
Nominal value of the voltage
transformer
primary
U2N [V]
Nominal value of the voltage
transformer
secondary
Uf [V]
Voltage drop (amount) on the
line
Uf [V]
Voltage drop (pointer) on the
line
Uact
Actual value of the voltage
uk [%]
Short-circuit voltage of the
transformer; component of the
nominal voltage, which operates in
the nominal current in the shortcircuited secondary winding
Uset
Setpoint value of the voltage
UT [V]
Voltage at the transformer
(r.m.s value)
REG-DA operating manual
301
REG-DA
302
Symbol
Definition
UV [V]
Voltage at the consumer
(r.m.s value)
W [V]
Command variable (XR + XK)
X [V]
Actual value of the command
variable
(of the voltage)
X0
Reference value for limit values
(setpoint value or 100/110 V)
Xd [V, %]
Regulation difference (negative
regulative deviation: Xd = - Xw)
XK [V]
Correction quantity (Uf)
XR [V]
Setpoint value, set on the Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer
Monitoring
XR100 [ V ]:
Setpoint that is defined as the
100% value.
Xw [%] (relative)
Regulative deviation
[(X - W) / W] 100 %
Xw [V] (absolute)
Regulative deviation (X - W)
Xwb [%]
Rated relative regulative deviation;
control commands are activated
when Xwb = 1%
Xwz [%]
Permissible regulative deviation, set
on the Relay for Voltage Control &
Transformer Monitoring; indication
in ± n% in relation to W
Y [1]
Correcting variable 1 tap
Yh [1]
Setting range
number of tap-changes
Z [V]
Influencing variable
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
18
Factory Settings of the Parameters
Parameters
Factory
setting
Trigger
125.0 V
Limitation(I)
Setting
Range
Reference
6.0 V ... 160.0 V −
0.0% ... 40.0%
−
Actual value
correction voltage
0.0
-20% ... +20%
Unom
Actual value
correction current
0.0
-20% ... +20%
Inom
Kni
1.00
0.01 ... 10000
−
Knu
1.00
0.01 ... 4000
−
LDC
(Line drop
compensation)
R: 0.0 ... 30.0 Ω −
X: 0.0 ... 30.0 Ω
Regulative deviation, 2%
permissible
±0.1% ... 10%
Backward highspeed switching
10.0%
0.0% ... +35.0% setpoint
value
Forward high-speed
switching
-10.0%
-35.0% ... 0.0% setpoint
value
setpoint
value
Setpoint value 1 ... 4 100 V
60.0 V ... 140.0 V −
Gradient (I)
0.0%
0.0% ... 40.0%
Inhibit Low
-25%
-75.0% ... 0.0% Setpoint
value or
100/110 V
Undervoltage < U
-10.0%
-25% ... +10%
Overvoltage > U
10%
0.0% ... + 25.0% Setpoint
value or
100/110 V
>I
100.0%
0% ... 210%
Inom
1A/5A
<I
0.0%
0% ... 100%
Inom
1A/5A
REG-DA operating manual
−
Setpoint
value or
100/110 V
303
REG-DA
304
Parameters
Factory
setting
Setting
Range
Reference
Time factor
1.0
0.1 ... 30
−
Trigger time
0s
0 ... 999 s
−
Backward high0s
speed switching time
0 ... 999 s
−
Forward high-speed
switching time
2s
2 ... 999 s
−
Inhibit low time
0s
0 ... 999 s
−
Undervoltage time
0s
0 ... 999 s
−
Overvoltage time
0s
0 ... 999 s
−
Time > I, < I
0s
0 ... 999 s
−
REG-DA operating manual
REG-DA
19
Notes on the Interpreter Language
Notes on the Interpreter Language REG-L (REG-Language) can
be ordered separately or can be downloaded from our website
www.a-eberle.de or
www.regsys.de
Furthermore, all help texts may be displayed directly on the
Relay for Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring using a
terminal program (? ).
REG-DA operating manual
305
REG-DA
20
Index
Symbols
“++” symbols 149
Numbers
1. setpoint value 111
100% value 111
2. setpoint value 112
24 hour load curve 266
2-wire line 101, 269
3 conductor circuit 187
3-phase current systems 24
4-wire line 269
4-wire transmission technology (RS485)
101
A
Abbreviations 294
Absolute limits 245
Active component 229
Active current 288
Activity lamp 294
Actual value 52
Actual value correction current 303
Actual value correction voltage 303
Actual value X 226
Actuator 226
Add-Ons 124
Addresses (A ... Z4) 91
Addressing 270
Adjusting the setpoint 227
Allen key 224
Analogue channels 203
Analogue input 300
Analogue output 300
Angle 229
Angle difference 230
Angular relationship 138
Apparent power 301
Application menu 187
ARON circuit 53
Aron circuit 29, 138
306
AUTO 294
AUTO lock when E-LAN error occurs 133
Automatic 294
Auxiliary voltage 9, 29
Auxiliary voltage failure 129, 293
B
Background illumination 293
Background information 226
Background program 100, 142, 144, 228,
242, 270, 295
Backward high-speed switching time 304
Band boundaries 260
Band violation 260
Basic settings 91
Basic time 253, 301
Battery 221
Battery status 104
Baud rate 214, 215
BCD-coded signals 128
Binary inputs 34
Binary output 241
Block diagram 21
Booster 102
Bridge 32
Broadcast Message 270
Bus 267
Bus configuration 101
Bus device index 270
Bus error 151
Bus errors 291
Bus left 101
Bus line 101
Bus link 288
Bus repeater 267
Bus right 101
Bus segment 270
Bus station 267, 270
Busbar 154, 226, 271, 273, 274, 275,
280
Busbar replica 57, 163
REG-DA Operating Manual
REG-DA
C
Cause of fault 241
Changeover from 1 A to 5 A 32
Changing the Fuse 221
Channel display 59
Characteristic curve 231, 232, 253
Circuit breakers 155
Circuits 23
Circulating current 271, 273, 275, 300
Circulating current regulation 271, 272,
273, 288, 291
Circulating reactive current 271, 272, 273,
275
Clamping angle 45
COM 1 97
COM 2 99
Command variable 226, 227, 230, 252,
271, 291, 302
Compromise 291
Condensation 225
Connection diagram 14, 153
Connection levels 13
Connector blocks 224
Consumer 228
Contact assignment 21
Continuous message 126
Continuous signal 274, 294
Contrast 293
Control 226
Control command 246
Control elements 47
Control Influence 114
Control level 293
Control performance 226
Control procedure 259
Control room 49
Control voltage 31
Controlled system 226
Correction quantity 228, 302
Coupling 174
Couplings 155
Creep NBD 295
REG-DA Operating Manual
Creeping net breakdown 134, 248, 295
Lock Time 134
Number of Changes 135
Recognition 134
Time slice 135
Crosslink 57
CTS 41
Current Display 129
Current influence 116, 271
Current input and voltage input 29
Current inputs 32
Current loop 188
Current source 188
Current transformer 29, 32, 228, 232,
300
Current-dependent influencing 271
D
Data transfer. 219
Date 58
DCD 41
DCF77 100
∆cos ϕ - Emergency Program 291
∆cos ϕ procedure 272, 288
Deadband 226
Definition of abbreviations 294
Delete total number of tap-changes 96
Deleting Passwords 95
Delivery state 25, 33, 34
Demo mode 61
Designs 44
Device fault 224
∆I sin ϕ (S) procedure 272, 280
∆I sin ϕ procedure 272, 275
Difference 291, 300
Dimensions 12
DIP switch 191
Direction of the active power 231
Disassembly 224
Disconnector 155
Display 47
Display elements 49
307
REG-DA
Display modes 52
Monitor mode 52
Recorder mode 52
Regulator mode 52
Statistics mode 52
Transducer mode 52
Displaying the regulative deviation 239
DSR 41
DTR 41
Dual display 55, 59
E
Editing of the signal 241
E-LAN 101, 267, 274, 291
ELAN Err 294
E-LAN error 133
E-LAN error (error on bus) 294
E-LAN interfaces 101
E-LAN left 294
E-LAN right 294
ELAN-L 294
ELAN-R 294
E-mail 219
Emergency program 291
Equalisation of the tap-change positions
181
Equipment 42
Error detection 188
Error flags 184, 277, 281
Exceeding the measurement range 188
External-conductor voltages 24
F
Fault description 224
Fault signals 49, 58
Faults 241
Feature K1 175
Feature M1 24, 29
Feature M2 31, 53, 138
Feeding point 57
Feedrate speed 55, 60
Firmware-Version 104, 154
Flange plate 224
Fluctuation range 238
308
Forward high-speed switching time 304
Full load 234
Fuse 9
Fuse holder 30
Fuse selection 223
G
General 91
Gradient 117, 228, 233, 234, 272, 301,
303
Gradient and limitation 116
Group 173
Group list 115, 176, 273, 275, 284
Group position 177
Guide value for Xwz 239
H
Hardware handshake 214
Hexadecimal number 104
Higher-level systems 99
High-resistance earth contact 31
High-speed backward switching 303
High-speed backwards switching when
overvoltage occurs 120
High-speed forward switching 303
High-speed forward switching when undervoltage occurs 120
High-speed switching 246, 247, 295
High-speed switching HIGHER limit signal
transmitter 243
High-speed switching LOWER limit signal
transmitter 242
High-speed switching when undervoltage/
overvoltage occurs 120
Hole pattern 44
How to change the simulated current 148
How to change the simulated phase angle
148
How to change the simulated voltage 148
Humidity 225
Hyperbolic characteristic curve 255, 256
I
I Current limit 118
REG-DA Operating Manual
REG-DA
ID data of the REG-DA Relay for Voltage
Control & Transformer Monitoring 104
Illogical tap-changes 186, 279, 283, 287,
290
Independent (I) 173
Indication 174
Inh. Low 295
Inhibit low limit signal transmitter 245
Inhibit low time 304
Input assignments 142
Input channel 142
Input functions 34
Input quantity 241
InputErr 294
Inputs 25
Integrating time programs 259
Integrator 226, 238
J
Jumper 32
K
Kni 303
Knu 303
L
Label strips 47
Lamp check 58
Language selection 131
LCD contrast 94, 293
LCD display 293
LCD saver 130, 293
LDC 294, 303
LDC-Parameter R 116
Lead sealing 12
Lead-sealing wire 12
LED 294
LED assignments 145
LEDs 47
LEVEL 295
Level detection 188
Level-controlled activation 160
Level-controlled switching 296
Life contact 33
REG-DA Operating Manual
Limit base 135
Limit signal 241
limit signal 241
Limit signal <I 244
Limit signal >I 244
Limit signal trigger 242
Limit value 300
Limit value violation 241
Limitation 114, 117, 232, 303
Limitation of the current-dependent setpoint influencing 117
Limit-value transmitter <U 244
Limit-value transmitter >U 243
Line drop compensation 229, 294, 303
Linear characteristic line 258
Load 228
Load changes 260
Load current 227, 271, 300
Load point 229, 230
Load situation 260
Loading procedure 261
Lock control command 33
Lock duration 249
LOGBOOK memory 107
Loop resistance 270
Lower part of the housing 30
M
mA inputs 42
mA outputs 42
Maintenance 220
Maintenance and repair works 10
Manual/Automatic 127
Bistable switching behaviour 127
Flip/Flop switching behaviour 127
Master (M) 173
Master-Slave Independent 173
Master-Slave procedure 173, 272, 284
Maximum tap difference 136
Maximum tap-change difference 250
Maximum time TC in operation 126, 246
Measurement input 189
Measurement quantity 249
Measurement transformers 292
Measurement value simulation 146
309
REG-DA
Measuring circuit 223
Membrane keypad 47
Memory 55
Menu selection 51
Minimisation of the circulating reactive current 273, 274
MMU display 59
Monitoring algorithm 181
Monitoring of extreme operating values
241
Monitoring tasks 241
Monitoring the tap-changer 250
Motor circuit breaker 144
Mounting bars 44
Mounting holes 44
Mounting on standard mounting rails 46
Mounting panel 45
Mounting surface 44
MSI 173
MSI_Ind 177
MSI_Ma 177
MSI_Sl 177
Multimaster 267
Multimaster structure 270
N
Net-cosϕ 115
Network 271
Network conditions 29
Network voltage 226, 291
No tap-change 186, 278, 283, 286, 290
No. of switching operations 226, 238
Nominal isolation voltage 23
Nominal power 272, 275, 280
Nominal power of the transformer 115,
272
Nominal transformation 292
Nominal transformation of measurement
transformers 292
Nominal transformation ratio of the voltage
transformers 292
Nominal translation of current transformers
292
Nominal value of the gradient 232
Nominal voltage 232, 234
310
Non-fused earthed conductor 9
Number of tap-change positions 176
O
OFF 294
Oil temperature 42
Open ring 267
Operating in parallel 150, 153, 173, 271,
274
Operating panel 269
Operating personnel 49
Operating Principle 51
Operating principle 51
Operating the transformers in parallel 272
Oscillations 276, 281
Output 226
Output level 267
Outputs 25
Overvoltage 118, 303
Overvoltage time 304
P
PAN-D 104, 217
PAN-D Voltage Monitoring Unit 104
PAN-D voltage monitoring unit 104
Panel-mounting version 45
ParaGramer 57
Parallel operation 291
Parallel program 113, 136, 294
Parallel program activation 132
Parallel regulation program 272
Parallel transformer regulation 113
Parameter for parallel program 114
Parameter menus 114
Parameterisation of the REG-DA Relay for
Voltage Control & Transformer Monitoring
108
Parameterisation panel 49
Parameters 303
ParErr 184, 295
Par-Prog 294
PASSWORD 94
Password 12, 95
Password request 95
REG-DA Operating Manual
REG-DA
Past values 55
People-process communication (MPK) 47
Permissible circulating currents 273
Permissible Icirc 276
Permissible regulative deviation 52, 109,
238, 239
Phase voltage 31
PhaseFail 295
Plausibility 242
Plug-in module 12
Plug-in shoe 30
Position of the deadband 284
Potential-free relay 33
Prerequisites for MSI operation 175
Primary side 233
Primary value 111
Primary voltage 227, 260
Printed nameplate 30
Procedure for determining measurement
values 255
PROG 295
Programming and parameterisation software 11
Programs 113
Progress bar 261
Protective earth 30
PT 100 42
Pulse-controlled activation 160
Q
Quasi-analogue scale 54
Quick 295
R
r.m.s. value 229, 301
Rating factor 252, 253
Reactance 229
Reaction delay 246, 255
Reaction time 253
Reactive component 273
Reactive component of the load current
276
Reactive current 275, 276, 281, 288, 301
Reactive current difference 288
Record 267
Recorder display 55
Recorder mode 54
Reference value 302
Reference value for the limit values 245
Reflections 269
REG-5A/E 256
REG-D current consumption 223
REG-L 242
Regulating quantity 238, 302
Regulation behaviour 109
Regulation behaviour time factor 109
Regulation criteria 271
Regulation difference 238, 302
Regulation program 272, 274, 275
Regulation result 288
regulative deviation 52, 238, 249, 252,
302, 303
Regulative deviation Xw 226
Regulator inhibit low when undervoltage
occurs 121
Regulator mode large display 130
Relative humidity 225
Relative Limits 245
Relay assignments 143
Relay outputs 33
relay outputs 301
Remote control command 48
Repeater 267
Replacement device 224
Replacement fuse 30
Resetting Fault Signals 58
Resetting the measured value memory 95
Resetting the tap-counter 96
Resistance input 187
Resistance measurement equipment 187
RI 41
Rotating memory 107
RTS 41
Running time exceeded 294
Running time of the motor drive 126
RXD 41
S
Safety class 30
REG-DA Operating Manual
311
REG-DA
Safety regulations 9
Scale section 61
Scope of delivery 11
Secondary factor 292
Secondary side 233
Secondary value 111
Secondary winding 301
Selecting the regulation procedure 150
Selection of the operating mode 180
Self-conduction of the operation mode
129
WITH 129
WITHOUT 129
Set of curves 257
Setpoint adjustment 133
Setpoint deviation 52
Setpoint value 52, 227
setpoint value 111, 133, 226, 233, 234,
296, 303
Setpoint value 1 295
Setpoint value 2 296
Setpoint value 3 296
Setpoint value 4 296
Setpoint value correction 239
Setpoint value reduction 234
Setting inhibit low if I 136
Setting values 234
Settings recommendation 263
Setup menu 58
Short circuit voltage 272, 275, 276, 280,
301
Signal level 102
Signal-Ground 41
Simulated current 148
Simulated phase angle 148
Simulated tap-change 149
Simulated voltage 148
Simulation mode 147
Simulation time 147
Simulator for the quantities U, I, and j 147
Single-phase connection 29
Slave (S) 173
Small voltage 23
Small voltage deviations 252
312
Socket connectors
Socket connector 1 (binary outputs
BO) 33
SP-1 295
SP-2 296
SP2Level 296
SP-3 296
SP-4 296
SP-decr. 296
Special version 32
SP-incr. 296
Spur line lengths 270
Standard regulating functions 24
Standard value 301
Standby mode 174
Standstill 247, 295, 303
Start bootstrap loader 215
Station ID 91
Station name 92
Statistics mode 56
Status 104
Storage 221, 225
Sum current 271, 291
Supply voltage 33
Switching delay 241, 253
<U 122
> I, < I limit value 122
>U 121
High-speed backward switching 123
High-speed forward switching 123
Standstill 124
Tripping 122
Switching difference 241
Switching hysteresis 241
Switching operations 155
Switching problems 181
Switching status 163
Switching statuses 57, 155
Switching to a setpoint value 227, 294
Symbols 300
Synchronising the time 100
System identification 104
REG-DA Operating Manual
REG-DA
T
Tap-change 52, 128, 239, 271, 273
OFF 128
Tap-change adjustment 155
Tap-change command 260
Tap-change difference 273
Tap-change equalisation procedure 173
Tap-change operation 259
Tap-change procedure 226
Tap-change signal 279, 283, 287, 290
Tap-change voltage 226
Tap-changer 226, 241, 246, 247, 250
Tap-changer drives 246
Tap-changer in operation time 246
Tap-changer running time 294
Tap-changes in the wrong direction 185,
278, 283, 286, 289
Tap-changes under load 56
Tap-changing transformer 52, 227
TapErr 184, 295
TC. i. Op 294
TC-Err+ 294
TC-Err. 294
Technical data 12
Telegram length 267
Temperature range 225
Temporary message 126
Temporary signal 294
Terminal diagram 25
Terminal voltage 271
Terminate 102
Terminating resistance 269
Terminating resistor 101
Three-tap-change regulator 226
Time 58, 93
Time > I 304
Time axis 55
Time behaviour 109, 110, 226
Time factor 109, 253, 266, 304
Time program 110
Time range 55
Time reference line 58
Time search 59
Time sequence 246
Tolerance band 55, 238, 252
REG-DA Operating Manual
Topology 269
Trans 296
Transducer mode 53
Transformer 226, 234, 239
Transformer configuration 153
Transformer group list 273, 274
Transformer monitoring 42
Transformer mounting 138
Current 140
Current (conversion 1 A / 5 A) 140
Current transformer mounting ratio
141
Voltage 138
Voltage transformer ratio 140
Transformer mounting ratio 301
Transformer tap-change position 239
Transit channel 296
Transmission lengths 102
Transmission line 269, 270
Transmission rate 267
Trend memory 110, 261
Trigger time 304
Triple-wound application 32, 294
Triple-wound applications 24
Tripping 119, 294, 303
Trouble-shooting 184
Twin connector block 30
TXD 41
Type of characteristic line 233
Type of voltage 31
Types of lines 269
Types of power supply units 30
U
Uf/I characteristic line 301
Undervoltage 117, 303
Undervoltage side 271
Undervoltage time 304
Unit time 259
Up/down 294
Update of the operating software 214
User 94
313
REG-DA
V
Variable command variable 227, 228
Voltage band 259
Voltage deviation 259
Voltage difference 229
Voltage dip 31
Voltage drop 226, 227, 228, 229, 230,
301
Voltage measurement input 188
Voltage pointer 230
Voltage regulation 271, 273
Voltage return 129
Voltage stability 274
Voltage value 58
Voltage-time diagram 58
W
Wall-mounting version 44
Warnings and Notes 9
Weak load 234
WinREG 11, 61, 92, 146, 177, 267
Z
Zero modem cable 214
314
REG-DA Operating Manual